06 07 SHOP PRACTICES MANUAL by wuxiangyu

VIEWS: 934 PAGES: 76

BINdINg                                                        1   BINdINg MAINTENANCE & REPAIR                                32
Alpine Binding Liability Indemnification                       3   Maintenance & Repair                                        33
    Schedule of indemnified bindings                      3           Retail & Rental Guidelines                          33
    Salomon Authorized Dealers                            4           Screw Extractor/Repair Kit                          33
    Legal Claims                                          4           Cants > Acceptable Use                              33
Binding Quick Reference Chart                                  5      AFD/SCP Replacement                                 34

RETAIL BINdINg SySTEMS                                         6   CERTIFICATION PROgRAM                                       35
Preparation                                                    7   Technician Certification Exam                               36
                                                                      2006/2007 Technician Certification Exam Questions   36
    Boot-to-Binding Compatibility                         7
                                                                      On-line Registration Instructions                   37
Installation                                                   8      2006/2007 Salomon Adjustment Chart                  38
    Jig Selection & Use                                   8           2006/2007 Technician Certification Answer Form      39
    Drilling, Tapping & Glue                              9
    General Retail Mounting                              10        SKI/SNOWBLAdE                                               40
    Smartrak System                                      11
                                                                   Technical Features                                          41
    Wide Ski Installation                                11
    Pilot Edge & Freeride Models Installation            12        Snowblade                                                   46
    Powder Option                                        12           Warning                                             46
    Jig Use With Extra Large Boot Soles                  12           Snowblade Liability Indemnification                 46
    Competition Bindings > Intended Use                  12           Snowblade Binding > Large sizes compatibility       46
    ZZ Speed 2 Interface                                 13           Snowblade Maintenance & Repairs                     46
    ITF Free & Fast Interface Installation               13           Storing Snowblade                                   47
    Special Brakes                                       13           Adjustment                                          47
    Powerplate Junior                                    13        Maintenance & Repairs                                       48
Binding-to-Boot Adjustments                                   14      Ski maintenance                                     48
    Adjusting                                            14           Repairing the surface of the ski and snowblade      50
                                                                      The TPP top surface                                 50
Release Value Selection & Adjustment                          15      Base repairs                                        50
    Determining Skier Type                               15           Replacing the tip protector                         51
    Requested Settings                                   15           Replacing edges                                     51
    2006/2007 Salomon Adjustment Chart                   16
Final Checking & Visual Inspection                            17   BOOT                                                        52
    Visual Inspection of System Components               17        Standard Boot Norms                                         53
    Test for Elastic Travel & Return                     17
    Test for Boot/Binding Compatibility                  17        Technical Features                                          53
Mechanical Inspection                                         18   Salomon Foot Measurer                                       55
    Twist Test & Forward Lean Tests                                   Warning, procedure, and recommendations             55
         > Release Value Within Specified Range          18        Advanced Fit Technology Liner                               56
    Troubleshooting                                      19           Technical description                               56
Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping                   20      Liner Models                                        56
    Skier Instruction & Warning                          20           Thermoforming machine > Procedure                   57
    Retail Record Keeping                                20        Salomon Boot Technologies                                   58
    Salomon Workshop Form*                               21        Boot Concepts                                               59
                                                                      SPK 59
RENTAL & dEMO BINdINg SySTEMS                                 22      Falcon / Instinct / Gun / Scarlet                   60
Preparation                                                   23      X Wave / Rush / Foil / Mynx                         61
    Boot-to-Binding Compatibility                        23           Ellipse / Siam                                      62
    Jig Selection                                        23           Performa / Irony                                    63
                                                                      Women's Models                                      64
Installation                                                  23
                                                                      Symbio™ Rental Model                                64
    Salomon Synchro System                               24
    e2™ Ski/Boot/Binding System                          24        Foot anatomy and fit                                        65
                                                                      Notions of anatomy                                  65
Binding-to-Boot AdJustments                                   25
                                                                      Recommendations & Performance Accessories           66
    Adjusting                                            25
Release Value Selection & Adjustment                          25   HELMET & POLE                                               68
    2006/2007 Salomon Adjustment Chart                   25
                                                                   Helmet Technology                                           69
Rental Visual & Mechanical Inspection                         25      Helmet Technical Information                        69
    Rental Testing Overview                              25           Helmet Technical Reference Chart                    71
    Rental Pre-Season Inspections                        26
                                                                   Pole Technonolgy                                            71
    Rental In-Season Inspections                         27
                                                                      Pole Technical Reference Chart                      71
    Demo Inspections > Incomplete Systems                27
                                                                      Pole Technical Information                          72
    Maintenance Records                                  28
Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping                   29   WARRANTy                                                    73
    Rental Skier Instrucion & Warning                    29           Salomon Retail Binding Limited Warranty             73
    Rental Record Keeping                                29           Salomon Alpine Skis, Snowblade & Boot Warranty      73
    Salomon Rental Form*                                 30           Salomon Helmet & Alpine Pole Warranty               73
    Post Accident Ski Equipment Inspection Report Form   31

 The Smartrak Interface offers a balanced flex
 pattern, and maximizes ski to snow contact.

 The Smartrak Interface offers the widest
 footprint of any system on the market.
 Specifically designed to offer the best
 performance on wider skis.

 This pre-installed ramp built into the interface
 puts the skier in the optimal position over the ski
 to ensure proper balance.

                                                       The new Z Binding Concept offers the tightest
                                                       boothold available, for the best transmission
                                                       of energy from the boot to the ski
                                                                                Carbon reinforced
                                                                                composite housing
                                                                                • Stiffer body

                                                                                Long wings
                                                                                • Shock absorption and

                                                                                Salomon Control Pedal
                                                                                • Maximum lateral rigidity

                                                       LIgHT WEIgHT
                                                       Using lightweight carbon injected
                                                       components, the new Z concept is the lightest
                                                       weight performance binding available.
BINdINg                                                                                                    IntroductIon > 

The 2006/2007 Shop Practices Manual is published by Salomon for Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding
Dealers. This manual provides current technical information, certification requirements, and indemnification
information. Please keep a copy of this Manual on hand as a quick, easy, and reliable reference for servicing
Salomon alpine bindings. Because the content of the Manual changes every year, you should keep previous
editions available as references for servicing older products. Your Salomon Certification Web site will one
day provide a resource of archived material for your reference as well.
Salomon continues to be the number one winter sports brand worldwide. Our goal is to advance our break-
through technologies featuring innovation in safety and performance binding systems.

Salomon provides its Authorized Alpine Binding Dealers with information contained in this publication:
1. To help assure skiers that Salomon alpine bind-                             2. To serve as a risk management tool for the
   ings are properly selected, mounted, adjusted,                                 Authorized Dealer.
   and serviced.
Authorized Alpine dealer                Technician Certification                 Registration and Exam and re-       Certification Fees
Requirements                            • Only a technician sponsored by         ceive confirmation of your certi-   Authorized Alpine Binding Dealers
While it is not necessary for an          a Salomon Authorized Alpine            fication instantly.                 will be invoiced an administra-
Authorized Location to have all of        Binding Dealer may be certified.                                           tive registration fee for technician
its personnel certified, sales people     To complete the technician certi-    5. Authorized Dealers can log onto    certifications.
and managers are encouraged to            fication process:                       www.salomoncertification.com
remain aware of Salomon’s certifi-                                                (in the U.S.) or                   • For the U.S., a $12 fee will be
cation and record keeping require-      1. Read this manual and become            www.salomonhookup.ca (in             invoiced for each Registration
ments.                                     familiar with required Salomon         Canada) to receive a current         and Exam submitted on line at
                                           shop practices. A correspond-          list of their Salomon Certified      www.salomoncertification.com
• Salomon Authorized Alpine                ing CD is available to assist          Technicians.
  Binding Dealers must have at             in this process. For a copy of                                            • The U.S. fee is $18 for each
  least one Salomon Certified              the CD, contact your Salomon        • Technician certification is valid     Registration/ Exam submitted
  Technician working at each               sales or Customer Satisfaction        for two years from the exam date      by mail or fax to Salomon, or
  Authorized Location selling, ser-        Representative.                       (unless Salomon provides fur-         for technicians certified by any
  vicing or renting Salomon alpine                                               ther notice).                         approved industry training pro-
  bindings.                             2. Be familiar with earlier editions                                           gram.
                                           of Salomon Shop Practices           • Technician certification is not
                                                                                                                            Fax: (971) 234-7002
• The technician who signs the             Manuals and Salomon Technical         valid at a location that is not
                                           Updates.                              a Salomon Authorized Alpine                Salomon Certification/
  Authorized Location’s workshop
                                                                                 Binding Location.                          Customer Service
  or rental form for any transac-
  tion must be currently Salomon        3. Be familiar with Salomon bind-                                                   5055 North Greeley Ave.
  alpine binding certified.                ings through hands-on experi-       • Technician certification may be            Portland, OR 97217
                                           ence.                                 transferred from one Salomon
• It is an Authorized Dealer’s re-                                               Authorized Alpine Binding           • For Canada, a $30.00 fee will be
  sponsibility to maintain sufficient   4. For the U.S., log on to               Dealer to another by contacting       invoiced for each Certification
  records to identify its Certified        www.salomoncertification.com.         the certification coordinator by      Kit sent to the dealer.
  Technicians.                             For Canada, log on to                 mail or telephone (Portland for       Technicians must Register
                                           www.salomonhookup.ca.                 U.S. dealers and Concord for          and take the Exam on-line at
                                           Complete the on-line 2006/2007        Canadian dealers).                    www.salomonhookup.ca
                                           Salomon Certified Technician
BINdINg                                                                                         IndemnIfIcatIon > 

 Schedule of indemnified bindings
Salomon alpine binding indemnification applies to the 2006/2007 Retail Binding Line, 2006/2007 Rental
Binding Line, Non-current Retail Binding Line and Non-current Rental Binding Line models listed below.
Indemnification does not apply to older non-indemnified binding models.
Non-Indemnified Bindings
Older models of Salomon bindings no longer on the Schedule of Indemnified Bindings may still be serviced, however Liability Indemnification will not
be offered by Salomon for these models of bindings. Dealers wishing to service these models of bindings can reduce their liability risk by requiring an
additional waiver and release agreement and attaching it to the Workshop Form. Such waivers should be reviewed by a dealer’s own legal counsel to
ensure compliance with applicable laws.
Salomon bindings are not designed or tested for use with Mono Boards, therefore bindings mounted on Monoboards will not be indemnified.

Retail Binding Line

2006/2007            C608                   S912 FIS Pilot         Poweraxe             S850 Carve             S710 Cp              C305 GROM
                     C607                   S912 Ti Pilot        S900 Equipe Alium      S850 Axe+              S710 Ti              C305 MINI GROM
Z12 Ti Smartrak      C509 Dr+               S912 Ti SC Pilot       Drive Plus           S850                   S710                 Quadrax 300
Z10 Smartrak         C509                   S912 Ti Pe           S900 Equipe Alium      S812 Pa                S710 Pilot           Q300
Z 920 Lab            C305 / C305 MINI       S912 Pe                Axe+                 S811 PS                S710 SC Pilot        S300
Z 916 Lab            Driver Suspension      S912                 S900 Equipe Alium      S810 Ti                S710 Ti Pilot        Driver 197 Equipe
Z 914 Lab              997 Equipe           S910 T FIS           S900 Equipe            S810 Ti Axe+           S710 Ti Cp2            Junior
914 F1S 20           Driver Suspension       26,3/24/20          S900 Carbon            S810 Cp                S710 Pa              197 Equipe Junior
914                    997 Carbon           S910 T Ps              Poweraxe             S810 Ps                S710 DP              177 Equipe Junior
Z12 Ti               Driver 997 Equipe      S910 FIS 24          S900 Carbon Drive      S810                   S710 CP2             177
Z10 Ti Axe +         Driver 997 Carbon      S910 T                 Plus                 S810 Ti Pilot          S710 Axe+            Suspension DR9
Z10 Ti               997 Equipe / Carbon    S910                 S900 Carbon Axe+       S810 Pilot             S708 T Axe+            Equipe
Z10 FIS 20           997 EXP                S910 T Ps            S900 Carbon            S810 Ti SC Pilot       Quadrax 700          Suspension DR9 EXP
Z10                  977 Force              S910 T Axe+          S900 Ti                S810 Ti Ps             S700 Team Poweraxe   Quadrax 8 Carbon
710                  977 Team               SP900 Equipe         S900 Alium             S810 Axe+              S700 Team            Quadrax 8
610 CP               977 Composite          SP900 Equipe Alium   S900                   S810                   S700 Axe+            Suspension DR8
610                  977                    SP900 Alium          Driver Suspension      Quadrax 800 Carbon     S700                   Composite
609 D+               S914 Axe+              S900 Equipe Team       897 Composite        Quadrax 800            677                  Quadrax 7
609                  S914 Lab                Race                Driver Suspension      SP800                  C610 CP2             Quadrax 6
608                  S914 FIS 26.3/20/17    S900 Equipe Team       897                  S800 Poweraxe          S608 CP              Quadrax 6 Lady
607                  S914 FIS                Drive Plus          Driver 897 Composite   S800 Drive Plus        C608 CP2             Quadrax 5.5
305                  S914 Pe2               S900 Equipe Team     897 Equipe             S800 Alium             Q600 Poweraxe        Quadrax 5
                     S914                    Axe+                877 Equipe             S800                   Q600                 Quadrax 3
Non Current
                     S914 FIS Pilot         S900 Equipe Team     877                    797 Composite          Quadrax 600          Quadrax 3 Mini
C610 Cp              S914 Pilot             S900 Equipe Race     SP850                  Driver 797 Composite   577                  Quadrax Team
C610                 S914 Pe                S900 Equipe          S850 X-Mountain        797                    C509 D+              Team Junior
C609 Ti              S912 Ti Pe2             Poweraxe            S850 Poweraxe          777                    Q500                 Team
C609 D+              S912 FIS               S900 Equipe Drive    S850 Alium X-          777 Lady               C407 Grom            Force Junior
C609                 S912 FIS 24             Plus                  Mountain             S711 Ps                Quadrax 400          Force
C608 FIS 17          S912 Ti                S900 Equipe Axe+     S850 Carve w/Ramp      S711 Pa                Q400                 Extreme Carve
C608 Cp              S912 Ps                S900 Equipe Alium      Plus                 S711 Cp                S305 GROM

Rental Binding Line
2006/2007            Non Current            S900 Equipe SR       797 SC                 ST610 e2               C305 SR              Quadrax 3 SC
                                            Drive Plus           777 SR                 C609 SC                S305 Grom SC         Quadrax 3 SR
Z12 Ti Smartrak      Driver Suspension      S900 Equipe SR       712 e2                 C608 SR                Q300 SC              Quadrax 3
Z10 Smartrak         997 Equipe SR          S900 Equipe SC       Cosmic S712 SC         C608 SC                Q300 SR              Q3 SC
Z12 Ti SC            Driver 997 Equipe SC   Drive Plus           S711 SR                C607 SC                S300 SC              Q3 SR
Z10 Ti SC            Driver 997 Equipe      S900 Equipe SC       S711 SC                C607 SR                S305 SC              Force SR
710 SC               SR                     SP850 Test           710 e2                 C509 SR                C305 Grom SR
609 SC               997 Equipe SC          877 SC               Cosmic S710 SR         C509 SC                177 Team SR
609 SR               997 Equipe SR          S850 SR Drive Plus   Cosmic S710 SC         Q500 SC Drive Plus     177 RR
608 SC               977 Equipe Demo        S850 SC Drive Plus   Cosmic S710            Q500 SC                Quadrax 7 SC
607 SR               977 Demo               S850 SC              S708 T SR              Q500 SR                Quadrax 7 SR
305 SC               S912 Ti SC             S810 Ti SC           Q700 SC                477 RR                 Quadrax 6 SC
305 SR               S912 Ti Pe2 Demo       S810 SR              S700 Team SR           477 LR                 Quadrax 5 SR
N 920 Equipe Race    S912 Ti Pe Demo        S810 SC              S700 SR                Snowtrip ST 410        Quadrax 5 RR
N 916 Equipe         S912 Ti SR             S800 SR              S700 SC Drive Plus     C407 Grom SR           Q5 SR
Competition          SP900 Equipe Test      Driver 797 SC        S700 SC                Q400 SR                Quadrax 3 RR
BINdINg                                                                                        IndemnIfIcatIon > 

 Salomon Authorized dealers
Salomon offers liability indemnification to Salomon Authorized Dealers. Salomon will defend and indemnify
a Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Dealer against liabilities from claims presented by any customer of the
Authorized Dealer arising solely from the use of Salomon alpine bindings, provided:
A. The dealer purchased the alpine bindings from Salomon.                     H. The dealer provides written documentation of the technician’s employ-
B. The dealer has received written notice of a claim involving alpine bind-      ment and training (e.g., method of training, proof of certification, etc.).
   ings.                                                                      I. A copy of the properly completed workshop form or rental form, in-
C. The claim alleges use of the alpine bindings resulted in injury.              cluding a signed release, is submitted.
D. All Salomon recommendations, procedures and policies in effect at the      J. A properly completed Post Accident Ski Equipment Inspection Report,
   time of the incident were followed, including, but not limited to, those      the same as or equivalent to the exemplary form displayed in this
   contained in the Salomon Shop Practices Manual, Salomon Technical             manual, is submitted.
   Update (if applicable), Salomon Purchaser Policies and Salomon             K. Any other helpful information such as a Ski Patrol Incident Report
   General Terms & Conditions.                                                   Form is submitted.
E. The Certified Technician is of legal age.                                  L. The dealer notifies Salomon in writing within ten days of the date on
F. The dealer uses workshop and/or rental forms the same as, or equiva-          which the dealer first receives written notice of the claim.
   lent to, Salomon forms with currently approved Liability Release           M. The dealer cooperates fully in the investigation, litigation and/or settle-
   Language.                                                                     ment of the claim.
G. The dealer maintains proper and complete records for all Salomon           Salomon may terminate indemnification, with respect to Salomon al-
   bindings mounted and/or adjusted for a period of two years or the          pine bindings, upon providing written notice to the dealer.
   statute of limitations of the state or province, whichever is longer.

 Legal Claims
In the event a Salomon equipment user or anyone acting upon the equipment user’s behalf contacts the
Authorized Dealer regarding a potential claim:
1. Use your best efforts to determine the exact nature and details of the     4. Gather all information and documents required by Salomon listed in
   claim.                                                                        the Liability Indemnification section for that specific product and send
2. Avoid expressing opinions concerning the claim. You may, to the               the documents with a brief description of the incident to:
   extent that you have complied with all recommended procedures,
   indicate to the claimant or the claimant’s representative that recom-         USA                                  Canada
   mended procedures for service and adjustment of the equipment were            Legal Claims Department              Legal Claims Department
   followed.                                                                     Salomon North America                Salomon Canada
3. Notify your insurance company. Salomon indemnification is not a sub-          5055 North Greeley Avenue            3545 Thimens Blvd.
   stitute for liability insurance.                                              Portland, OR 97217                   Saint-Laurent, Quebec H4R 1V5

                                                    Selecion                                            drill Bit                                                                                                                                               Wing                             Adj.
                                                                                                                                                                            Skier Weight
                                                   (given ski                                          Selection                                                                                                                                                adj.                            Range

                                               (skis with no metal) (Ref. #)
                                               80 mm - 123 mm (Ref. #)

                                                                                                                                                                                                  Vertical progressive pivot
                                               (skis with metal) (Ref. #)
                                               56 mm - 80 mm (Ref. #)
                                               56 mm - 99 mm (Ref. #)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Weight of 1/2 pair (in g)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Senior / Junior norms
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Ski / binding interface

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Removable brake
                                               4.1 mm diameter

                                               3.6 mm diameter

                                                                                                                                                                                                  Spheric Oversize
                                               drill Bit Length

                                                                                                                                                                                                  diagonal pivot

                                                                                                                                                             Height (mm)

                                                                                                                                                 din scale

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     US Sizes

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Ti Line



Z12 Ti Smartrak               B80     787169                                                                                               9.5   4-12        31,5 30-107 66-235                    •             •      •      Smartrak control                        •           •            28 3,5 1020                                  Ti            S
Z10 Smartrak                  B80     787170                                                                                               9.5   3-10        31,5 30-107 66-235                    •             •      •      Smartrak control                        •           •            28 3,5 1308                                                S
914 FIS 20                    B75     786406                                                                                               9.5   6-14         20           58-130 127-286 •               •                                                     •                  •            24     3 1105,8                                            S
                              B85     786854
914                                                                                                                                        9.5   6-14        16,5 58-130 127-286 •                        •                                                     •                  •            24     3 1075,3                                            S
                              B100    786853
                              B80     786397
                              B85     786398
Z12 Ti                                                                                                                                     9.5   4-12        16,5 42-120 92-264                    •             •      •                                              •           •            28 3,5          841                          Ti            S
                              B90     786399
                                                                                       Drill Bit Ref. # 000893

                                                                                                                 Drill Bit Ref. # 000892
                                                                   Jig Ref. # 001157

                              B100    786968
                                               Jig Ref. # 001156

Z10 Ti Axe+ (U.S. only) B80           786401                                                                                               9.5   3-10        28,5 30-107 66-235                    •             •      •           Axe+                               •           •            28 3,5          940                          Ti            S
                              B80     786402
Z10 Ti                        B85     786403                                                                                               9.5   3-10        16,5 30-107 66-235                    •             •      •                                              •           •            28 3,5          855                          Ti            S
                              B90     786970
Z10 Fis 20                    B75     786361                                                                                               9.5   3-10         20           30-107 66-235           •             •      •                                              •           •            28 3,5 1006,5                                              S
Z10             (U.S. only) B80       786405                                                                                               9.5   3-10        16,5 30-107 66-235                    •             •      •                                              •           •            28 3,5          976                                        S
710             (U.S. only) B80       786407                                                                                               9.5   3-10        16,5 30-107 66-235                    •             •                                                     •           •            28 3,5          968                                        S
610 CP                        B80     786408                                                                                               9.5   3-10        28,5 30-107 66-235                                  •               Carve Plate                           •           •            28 3,5 1086                                                S
610             blue/alpine B80       786409
                                                                                                                                           9.5   3-10        16,5 30-107 66-235                                  •                                                     •           •            28 3,5          952                                        S
             graphite/white B80       786935
609 D+                        B80     786410                                                                                               9.5   2,5-9       23,5 30-100 66-220                                  •                 Drive+                              •           •            28 3,5 1013                                                S
609             (U.S. only) B80       786411                                                                                               9.5   2,5-9       16,5 30-100 66-220                                  •                                                     •           •            28 3,5          939                                        S

608            black/silver B75       786362
                                               # 001156

                                                                   # 001157
                                                                                       # 000893

                                                                                                                 # 000892

                                                                                                                                           9.5   2-7,5       16,5          22-85        55-187                   •                                                     •           •            28 3,5          920                                        S
                 red/black B75        786937
607         white/charcoal B75        786363
                                                                                                                                           9.5   2-7         16,5          22-80        55-180                   •                                                     •           •            28 3,5          919                                        S
                 red/black B75        786939
305              black/red    JR      786364
                                               # 000927

                                                                                       # 000813

                                                                                                                 # 000814

                silver/blue   JR      786941                                                                                               8.0 0,75-4,5       14           10-50        22-110                   •                                                     •                        44 5,5          570                                   J&S
                 white/red    JR      786943
305 Mini (Canada only)        JR      786365                                                                                               8.0 0,75-4,5       14           10-25        22-55                    •                                                     •                        44 5,5          570                                   J&S

                              B80     786366
Z12 Ti SC                     B90     786367                                                                                               9.5   4-12        31,5 42-120 92-264                           •      •      •             SC                               •           •            122 15          1226                         Ti            S
                              B100    786368
                                                                                       Drill Bit Ref. # 000893

                                                                                                                 Drill Bit Ref. # 000892
                                               Jig Ref. # 001003

                                                                   Jig Ref. # 001040

                              B80     786371
Z12 SC                                                                                                                                     9.5   4-12        31,5 42-120 92-264                           •      •      •             SC                               •           •            122 15          1356                                       S
                              B90     786372
                              B80     786369
Z10 Ti SC                                                                                                                                  9.5   3-10        31,5 30-107 66-235                           •      •      •             SC                               •           •            122 15          1213                         Ti            S
                              B90     786370
                              B80     786373
710 SC                                                                                                                                     9.5   3-10        31,5 30-107 66-235                           •      •                    SC                               •           •            122 15          1355                                       S
                              B90     786374
609 SC                        B80     786378                                                                                               9.5   2,5-9       31,5 30-100 66-220                                  •                    SC                               •           •            122 15          1285                                       S
609 SR          (U.S. only) B80       786379                                                                                               9.5   2,5-9        18           30-100 66-220                         •                   SR                                •           •            80   10         1016                                       S

                                                                                       000813 000893

                                                                                                                 000814 000892

608 SC                        B80     786966                                                                                               9.5   2-7,5       31,5          22-85        55-187                   •                    SC                               •           •            122 15          1285                                       S
                                               # 001003

                                                                   # 001040

607 SR                        B80     786375                                                                                               9.5   2-7          18           22-80        55-180                   •                   SR                                •           •            80   10         1016                                       S
305 SC                        JR      786376                                                                                               8.0 0,75-4,5       29           10-50        22-110                   •                    SC                               •                        86   11         830                                   J&S
305 SR                        JR      786377                                                                                               8.0 0,75-4,5 14,5               10-50        22-110                   •                   SR                                •                        56     7        590                                   J&S
BINdINg                                 retaIl systems > 

Proper procedures for a Salomon
Certified Technician to follow while
mounting and adjusting Salomon Retail
BINdINg                                                   retaIl systems > PreParatIon > 

Start out prepared with an efficient working area. Your bench should be the right height, with proper light-
ing, and with the necessary tools at hand. Familiarize yourself with all procedures before you start: being
prepared is the best way to avoid errors and costly mistakes. It is important that all components match

                                                                                                                                                               STEP 1
those listed on the workshop form. Refer to your workshop form and make sure the bindings are appropri-
ate for the skier. If the bindings have been used, make sure they are in good condition and no parts are
missing, broken, or showing signs of wear.

 Boot-to-Binding Compatibility
Before drilling the ski, be sure the   Other Compatibility Problems you May Encounter
boot you are using is compatible       • Cut-outs in the boot sole that       Only adult norm boots may be              A Salomon toe or heel may not be
with the binding. Only boots that        prevent the brake from engaging      used with adult bindings. Under           mounted with another manufac-
conform with applicable standards        properly.                            no circumstances should a junior          turer’s toe or heel. Indemnification
may be used with Salomon bind-         • Excessive ramping or wear of         norm boot ever be used with an            and warranty are automatically
ings. (See Standard Boot Sole            the boot sole at the point where     adult binding. Salomon bindings           voided for such mixed systems.
dimensions on page 53 for refer-         it contacts the binding. Any wear    that can be used with both junior         For Rental specific preparation in-
ence). If a boot sole is warped,         that inhibits binding function is    and adult norm boot soles are the         structions, please refer to page 23.
worn or improperly canted, such          excessive.                           S305, C305, Q300, S300, their
that there is more than a 1 mm         • Tread, grid pattern or insignia      Mini equivalents, earlier model
difference in sole flatness mea-         present in the AFD area of the       indemnified equivalents, and their
sured across its width, the boot is      boot sole. This area must be flat    various rental counterparts. (The
incompatible.                            over its entire surface.             added width of an adult norm boot
                                       • Non-compatible boot sole com-        sole somewhat limits the shock ab-
                                         position. Low-grade thermoplas-      sorption capability of these models
                                         tic (T.P.) boots may not be used     and they should not be used with
                                         with Salomon bindings. If you        a boot sole longer than 304 mm.
                                         are uncertain as to the quality of   As a result, it is recommended that
                                         the boot sole material, perform      an aggressive junior skier with an
                                         the Clean vs. Lubricated Test        adult norm boot sole use a model
                                         as described on page 19.             designed exclusively for adult
                                                                              norm boots.)

 REFERENCE                                                                     Junior Boot To Binding Compatibility Chart
 Page #   Section Name
                                                                              Junior                Boot        Junior     IMPORTANT:
 19       Clean vs. Lubricated Test                                           Boot Models          Norms     Bindings Only
 53       Standard Boot Sole
                                                                              Falcon 100           Adult                   Salomon bindings that can
                                                                              Course 90            Adult                       be used with both junior
                                                                              Course 80            Adult
                                                                                                                               and adult norm boot soles
                                                                              Course 70            Adult
                                                                                                                               are the S305, C305, Q300,
                                                                              Falcon 60            Junior           X
                                                                              Performa T3          Adult                       S300, their Mini equivalents,
                                                                              Performa T2          Junior           X          earlier model indemnified
                                                                              15 Mini              Junior           X
                                                                                                                               equivalents, and their
                                                                              Performa T3 Rental   Junior           X
                                                                              Performa T2 Rental   Junior           X          various rental counterparts.
         BINdINg                                                  retaIl systems > InstallatIon > 

         Salomon bindings are installed 3 ways. “À la carte” bindings are installed by drilling holes into the surface
         of the ski with the aid of a Salomon jig. Pilot Systems require no jigs and are simply secured to pre-drilled
         holes on a premounted Salomon interface. Smartrak Systems can require a combination of these two tech-
         niques. Please refer to the specific instructions in this Manual.

          Jig Selection & Use
                A                                        SD                 F          G                 H J K

          LEgENd                                Ref. #      Jig                            Jig range          Application
          A Handle with Self-Centering          788403      Smartrak                                    Z12 Ti Smartrak and Z10 Smartrak binding systems only
                                                                                                        Z12 Ti, Z10 Ti, Z10, S914 FIS, S912 Ti, S912 Ti A+, S912 FIS,
          S Toe Guide                           001156      Adult Senior                   56mm - 99mm S810, S810 Ti A+, S810 Ti, S710 Ti, S710, S610 CP, C610,
          D Tip-of-Boot Sole Indicator                                                                  C609 D+, C609, S910 FIS, C608 FIS, C607
          F Locking Lever                       001157   Wide Adult Senior                 80mm - 123mm (Same as above)
          G Mid-Sole Indicator                  000927   Junior                            56mm - 80mm C305 and C305 Mini
          H Boot Size Indicator                 78406101 Junior                            56mm - 99 mm C305 and C305 Mini
          J Drill Bit Bushing                            Synchro Center & Synchro
                                                001003                                 56mm - 99mm All SC and SR models both Senior & Junior
                                                         Rental/ Senior Junior
          K Self-Centering Guide for
            Heel of Boot                                 Wide Synchro Center &
                                                001040                                 80mm - 123mm All SC and SR models both Senior & Junior
                                                         Synchro Rental/ Senior Junior
                                               *Contact your customer service representative for additional jigs.

          Jig Use (10 Steps)
         A jig ensures that all holes for binding mounting are drilled in the correct location. The bushings guide the
         drill bit so that it remains perpendicular to the ski.
                                                                                            S            Correct                               incorrect

         1. Select the proper jig for the         rear handle to open the rear             a. If the ski has a mid-sole mark,      10. Re-check your work. The
            binding model to be mount-            clamps and slide the heel guide             align the mid-sole mark on the          ski is now ready to be drilled.
            ed by referencing the Jig             snugly against the boot heel.               boot with the mid-sole mark on          (Customers may request that
            Reference Guide.                      Fig. A                                      the ski.                                specific mounting instructions be
         2. Check the skis’ serial number      7. Close the locking lever.                 b. If the ski has a tip-of-boot            followed. This is particularly true
            to ensure you are mounting a          (Compare the mid-sole mark                  mark, align the tip-of-boot sole        for skiers who want to initiate
            matched pair. Place the skis on       on the boot with the mid-sole               indicator on the jig with the tip-      turns more easily. Make a note
            the workbench with the ski tips       indicator on the jig. If the mid-           of-boot mark on the ski.                on the Workshop Form of any of
            pointed to your left.                 sole mark on the boot and the            c. If the ski has no visible mark-         these special instructions.)
                                                  mid-sole indicator on the jig               ings for jig location, consult
         3. Open the jig by twisting both
                                                  do not agree, use the mid-sole              the ski manufacturer for proper
            handles inward. Place the jig on
                                                  mark on the boot. This requires             mounting position.                     REFERENCE
            the ski.                                                                                                                 Page #   Section Name
                                                  leaving the boot in the jig to           9. Once the jig is in position,           10       4-Hole Toe / Spheric
         4. Open the locking lever.
                                                  position it on the ski.)                    release the handles simultane-                  Oversize
         5. Extend the jig to accept the                                                      ously and the jig will center          10       3-Hole Toe / Spheric Sport
                                               8. Position the jig on the ski.                                                                & Quadrax
            boot.                                                                             itself on the ski.
                                                  Fig. S                                                                             23       SC System Demo
         6. Place the toe of the boot sole                                                                                           23       SR System Rental & Demo
            against the toe guide. Twist the
BINdINg                                                     retaIl systems > InstallatIon > 

INSTALLATION > drilling, Tapping and glue
 drilling, Tapping & glue

                                                                                                                               shorter the ski, the more likely
A           Correct                                    Incorrect                     S                                         washers will be necessary to
                                                                                                                               avoid dimpling the ski base.
                                                                                                                             • The new Salomon C607 ju-
                                                                                                                               nior accommodates adult norm
                                                                                                                               boot soles and offers a 2 to 7
                                                                                                                               DIN scale. This new intermedi-
                                                                                                                               ate binding for 5 to 10-year-olds

                                                                                                                                                                     STEP 2
                                                                                                                               features shorter 6 mm screws
Follow the recommendations of the           Drill through the jig’s proper bush-     need to use shorter screws or add         for use on junior skis as short as
ski manufacturer for drilling and           ings applying moderate downward          washers to the existing screws            120 cm.
tapping. In their absence, Salomon          pressure on the drill. Verify that the   between the binding and the ski         • Whenever junior bindings are
suggests that you use the Salomon           countersink bevel on the drill bit has   to prevent damaging the ski base.         mounted on adult skis, an in-
drill Bit Selection guide. When in          properly de-burred the hole. Fig. A      Before drilling any junior ski, check     creased possibility exists of bind-
doubt about the ski’s core composi-         After drilling, turn the ski over and    the screw depth by positioning the        ing pull-out due to poor screw
tion, select a 3.6 mm diameter bit          hit the base several times with the      binding over the mounting area so         retention. The penetration depth
and drill one hole. If the bit comes        palm of your hand to remove any          that the binding screws on one side       of junior screws into the ski core
in contact with any metal, re-drill         debris from the drilled holes.           of the heel track appear alongside        is only 7 mm. If necessary, use
with a 4.1 mm bit to ensure proper          When mounting thin skis or junior        the ski sidewall. Fig. S                  adult drill bits and screws to pen-
screw retention.                            skis with adult bindings you may         Special Cases When drilling               etrate any mounting platform.
                                                                                     Junior Skis                             • The hole must be deep enough to
                                                                                     • Use a 9.5 mm length drill bit           accommodate the screw length
 Salomon drill Bit Selection guide                                                     when mounting S910 Team,                you are using or ski damage may
   Skis         diameter           Length     Ref.              Aspect                 S608, and C608 and their earlier        result.
                4.1 mm                      000813                                     model predecessors. They use          *EXCEPTION: S305’s and C305’s
                                   8 mm
             (ski with metal)                1x5                                       the same screws as adult models        cannot be mounted on the
                3.6 mm                      000814                                     and should be drilled and tapped       Crossmax 10 Team or XScream
                                   8 mm
            (ski with no metal)              1x5                                       accordingly.                           10 Team models manufactured
                4.1 mm             9.5 mm   000893                                   • As a general rule, the S910 Team       from 2001 to 2003 inclusively.
             (ski with metal)                1x5                                       is mounted on skis 170 cm or
  Adult                                                                                                                       Both bindings may be mounted
                3.6 mm                      000892                                     longer and the S608 or C608 on
            (ski with no metal)
                                   9.5 mm    1x5                                                                              on the 2004-2005 models of the
                                                                                       skis 140–170 cm. The S608 or           Crossmax 10T and Crossmax T
                          Length                                                       C608 can also be used with skis        and 2006-2007 models of the X
                                                                                       120–140 cm. The S305 Grom              Wing T.
     diameter                                                                          and C305 Grom are generally
                                                                                       used with skis 80-140 cm*. The

                                            Tap all binding mounting holes           tap goes straight into the drilled      the tap. Each full turn of the brace
A                                           unless otherwise recommended             hole. Fig. A Apply only enough          cuts the tap approximately 2 mm
                                            by the ski manufacturer. Failing         pressure to the brace to start          into the ski. After tapping, turn the
                                            to tap when necessary can result         the tap, as the tap is a self-cut-      ski over and hit the base several
                                            in topskin delamination, sidewall        ting tool.                              times with the palm of your hand
                                            delamination, broken screws or           A ski mounting plate is usually         to remove shavings from the hole.
                                            damage to the ski core.                  no more than 8 mm below the
                                            The tap should be mounted into           topskin. Tapping any deeper than         REFERENCE
                                                                                                                              Page #        Section Name
                                            a brace. Position the brace so the       8 mm can strip the hole or break         8             Jig Selection & Use
                                                                                                                              8             Retail Mounting
 glue                                                                                                                         23            Rental & Demo Mounting

glue must be used when inserting binding screws to:                                                                           PARTS
                                                                                                                              Reference #   Item Name
• Lubricate the screw during insertion. Place a drop of glue on the surface          Caution: Salomon strongly recom-         000821        Blue Plastic Plugs
• Create a watertight seal.              of each hole. As the screw passes           mends its own glue for Salomon skis.     000818        Black Plastic Plugs
• Ensure that the screws will hold       through the glue it coats itself.                                                    000819        White Plastic Plugs
  while the ski is in use by acting as a                                                                                      000822        Grey Plastic Plugs
  dampener.                                                                                                                   000820        Red Plastic Plugs
                                                                                                                              000823        Orange Plastic Plugs
 Mounting                                                                                                                     000870        Green Plastic Plugs
                                                                                                                              000816        Taps
A Posidrive No. 3 screwdriver, not a Phillips, is used to mount Salomon                                                       000817        Tap Brace
bindings. Consult the Salomon Spare Parts Catalog for reference on the                                                        000811        Glue
Salomon screws. They are available through your customer service rep-                                                         000862        Posidrive Screwdriver
resentative.                                                                                                                  B18486        (CAN) Posidrive Bit
         BINdINg                                                   retaIl systems > InstallatIon > 10

         INSTALLATION > general Retail installation
          general Retail Mounting
                                                                                              Before mounting the toe, break           the component over the pre-
         A                                         S                                          off the small stem underneath            pared holes to begin installation
                                                                                              the forward base sub unit if one         (Fig. S). If a power screwdriver
                                                                                              remains (Fig. A).                        is used, adjust the clutch for the
                                                                                              All Salomon bindings feature             appropriate ski core construc-
                                                                                              the E-Z Mount System with the            tion. Hand check each screw after
                                                                                              screws already in place. Position        mounting.

          Toe Piece

         Toe Installation differs for 4-hole toe and 3-hole toe bindings. The former requires a criss-cross screwing pattern while the latter starts with a center
         mounting hole sliding track beneath the front of the toe.

         D                                         F                                         G

         4-HOLE TOE INSTALLATION                   Use a crisscross screwing pattern         3-HOLE TOE INSTALLATION                  Tighten the screw until it is firmly
         Performance/Spheric Oversize              and insert each screw until near-         Z-concept bindings, Spheric              seated. Next, slide the toe piece to-
         A long bit is needed (Posidrive           ly seated. Fig. F Do not tighten          Sport and Quadrax                        wards the seated center screw until
         Bit, CAN. only Ref. #B18486, for          until all the screws are in place.        For models with a 3-hole pattern,        the two rear screws align with their
         power drills and Salomon Manual           The baseplate of the AFD should           first pull the center mounting hole      respective holes.
         Screwdriver Ref. #000862) to              be flush with the topskin of the ski      sliding track out from the binding far   Tighten the rear screws until they
         mount the 4-hole pattern toes as          and each screw should be flush            enough to insert the screw into the      are firmly seated. The base plate
         the front two screws must be in-          with the baseplate of the toe piece.      ski. A long bit is needed (Posidrive     should be flush with the topskin of
         serted through the binding hous-          This procedure applies for all toe        Bit, CAN. only Ref. #B18486, for         the ski and the head of each screw
         ing. Fig. D                               pieces with a four-hole pattern.          power drills and Salomon Manual          should be flush with the baseplate.
                                                                                             Screwdriver Ref. #000862) Fig. G

          Heel Piece                                                                          Ski Brake
                                                   HEEL PIECE INSTALLATION                                                            SKI BRAKE INSTALLATION
         H                                         Place the heel over the prepared
                                                                                             J                                        Do not compress the ski brake
                                                   holes and insert the screws using                                                  before installing it. Place the two
                                                   a crisscross screwing pattern. (Do                                                 metal tabs on the front of the
                                                   not compress the ski brake before                                                  brake into the slots in the heel
                                                   it is mounted on the ski.) Fig. H                                                  base plate Fig. J. Rotate the rear
                                                   do not over tighten.                                                               of the brake downwards to start
                                                                                                                                      the screw in the track. Tighten
                                                                                                                                      screws with a hand screwdriver
                                                                                                                                      (4 Nm maximum).
                                                                                                                                      Note: The brake can be removed to
                                                                                                                                      facilitate ski maintenance.
                                                                                                                                      To remove it: turn the center screw
                                                                                                                                      counterclockwise and remove
                                                                                                                                      the brake.
                                          Z12 Ti

                                                             S912 Ti                                                                   REFERENCE
                                                                                                                                       Page #        Section Name
                                                                                                                                       9             Drilling, Tapping & Glue
                                                                                                                                       14            Binding-to-Boot
                                                                                                                                       23            SC System Demo
                                                                                                                                       23            SR System Rental & Demo
                                                                                                                                       32            Maintenance and Repairs

             Heel Track          Treadle                 Spheric Pedal/   Toe Height            Adjustment          Sliding Center     Reference #   Item Name

             Heel Housing        Brake Pedal             AFD              Adjustment Screw      Screw               Mounting Hole      000905 Salomon Grease
             Heel Lever          Pressure                Toe Cup          Visual Indicator      Baseplate           Lubrication        000862 Posidrive Screwdriver
                                 Distributors                             Housing               Brake Arm           Point*             B18486 (CAN) Posidrive Bit
             Heel Cup
         * Use Salomon grease (Ref. #000905) on track.
BINdINg                                                 retaIl systems > InstallatIon > 11

INSTALLATION > Model-specific installation
 Smartrak System
 A                                         S                                          D                                           F

 Smartrak System Installation

                                                                                                                                                                             STEP 2
There are two different mounting procedures for the Smartrack interface, based on the system type.
Smartrack grip & grip Plus (fixed         Install the heel unit by lifting the tab   Smartrak Control, Response, and             Install the heel piece by lifting the tab
toe systems):                             located just in front of the heel piece    Prolink (adjustable toe systems):           located just in front of the heel piece
Insert metal band into the recessed       and sliding the heel assembly onto         Insert the metal band into the re-          and sliding the heel assembly onto
slots in the plate. Fig. A                the Smartrak plate. Fig. F                 cessed slots in center of plate. Fig. A     the Smartrak plate until the boot sole
                                          Attach the brake in the usual manner.                                                  length number on the metal band cor-
determine sole length in mm of boot.                                                 determine the sole length of boot to
                                                                                                                                 responds to, or is slightly greater than,
Identify the letter on the metal band     Position the boot against the toe          being used.
                                                                                                                                 the sole length of the boot being used.
that corresponds to the boot sole         piece and slide the heel forward until     Lift the tab behind the AFD on the toe      For example: a boot sole length of
length. If the boot sole length is        it contacts the boot. Make sure the        piece and slide the toe piece from the      306mm would require that you chose a
between two numbers, choose the           heel piece “clicks” and locks into po-     rear of track to the front until the boot   setting on band of 308mm. Make sure
higher number.e.g.: For a boot sole of    sition on the track.                       sole length number on the metal band        the heel piece “clicks” and locks into
320mm, choose setting “334mm D”.          Push the boot into the system and          corresponds to, or is slightly greater      position on the track. Fig. F
Screw the center mounting sliding         verify the forward pressure.Once the       than, the sole length of the boot being
                                                                                                                                 Install the break in the normal man-
track into the correspondingly let-       forward pressure is correct, the num-      used. For example: a boot sole length
                                                                                                                                 ner and proceed with binding to boot
tered hole at the front of the Smartrak   ber on the metal band directly in front    of 306mm would require that you
                                                                                                                                 adjustments as described on page 14
plate. Fig. S                             of the heel provides a guide to the        chose a setting on the band of 308mm.
                                                                                                                                 or page 25.
                                          quick positioning of the second heel.      Make sure the toe piece “clicks” and
Finish mounting the three hole toe
                                                                                     locks into position on the track. Fig. D
as usual.

 Smartrak Interface Mounting
The Smartrak interface is available       jig aligns with center mark of ski.        front of the interface are positioned       Assemble Smartrak binding follow-
for use with flat skis.                   When installing a Smartrak plate           towards the tip of ski                      ing instruction as explained above
Position the Smartrak metal jig           make sure the recessed slots at the        Proceed with drilling, taping, and          in Smartrak System Installation.
(ref# 788403) so center mark on                                                      gluing as described on page 9.

 Wide Ski Installation

 A                                         S                                                                                      Wide Ski Brakes
                                                                a                                                                         1999 to Current Bindings
                                                                                                                                    Ski                       Leasure
                                                                                                                                   Width                     (Quadrax)
                                                                                                                                                Ref. #
                                                                                                                                   (mm)                        Ref. #

                                                                b                                                                    80
Wide Ski Jigs are available from          the jig and repositioning them to          • 80-106 mm skis: Wide sides of                 85
Salomon to mount bindings on              achieve the desired width. Fig. A            the reversible pads are positioned
wide skis. Select the proper jig for      The pads are properly positioned             to the inside of the ski. Fig. Sb             90
the binding to be mounted by refer-       when they touch the jig shoulder.          Refer to the Wide Ski Brakes chart                        001182
encing the Jig Selection Chart.           • 98-124 mm skis: Thin sides of            (right). The proper width fat ski                        78575101
Reversible pads adapt fat ski jigs to       the reversible pads are positioned       brake must be installed for each               115
                                            to the inside of the ski. Fig. Sa                                                                 78575201
different widths of skis. The pads                                                   specific system or indemnification
are changed by pulling them off                                                      for that system will not apply.
         BINdINg                                               retaIl systems > InstallatIon > 1

         INSTALLATION > Model-specific installation (continued)
          Pilot Edge & Freeride Models Installation

          Pilot Edge                                                                       Pilot Freeride
          A                                       S                                        D                                      F

         Select the correct position for the     Position the heel on the rear base
                                                                                           2005/2006 Pilot Retail Models*

         toe piece on the front base plate       plate by aligning the front 2 screws
         by aligning the 2 screws of the toe     of the heel piece with the holes                                Sticker #1     Sticker #2 Sticker #3           Sticker #4
         piece closest to the AFD with the       marked P2 Fig. S (Pilot Edge) &           Boot Sole Length 294-358 mm 284-348 mm 274-338 mm                   264-328 mm
         holes marked P1, P2, or P3, accord-     Fig. F (Pilot Freeride).                      P1 (boot length) 338-358 mm 328-348 mm 318-338 mm               308-328 mm
         ing to boot sole length Fig. A (Pilot                                                 P2 (boot length) 319-337 mm 309-327 mm 299-317 mm               289-307 mm
                                                                                               P3 (boot length) 294-318 mm 284-308 mm 274-298 mm               264-288 mm
         Edge) & Fig. D (Pilot Freeride).
                                                                                           Pilot Edge Model (ski length in cm)
                                                                                           Crossmax V12             178       170+169+162   154+146
                                                                                           Crossmax V10                       170+169+162   154+146
                                                                                           Crossmax V8                           180+175    155+150
          2005/2006 Pilot Rental Models*                                                   Demo 10 3V               170          165+160    155+150
                             Sticker #5    Sticker #6      Sticker #7     Sticker #8       Demo 10 2V               178       170+169+162   154+146
         Boot Sole Length 280-376 mm 270-366 mm           260-356 mm     250-346 mm        Demo 9                   178       170+169+162   154+146
         Pilot Edge Model (ski length)                                                     Equipe 9 GC              178       170+169+162   154+146
         Crossmax V12            178        170+162         154+146                        Equipe GC                178       170+169+162   154+146
         Equipe GC               178        170+162         154+146                        Equipe SC                170          165+160    155+150
         Equipe SC               170        165+160         155+150                        Rush 10                            170+169+162   154+146
         Rush 10                            169+162         154+146                        Pilot Freeride Model (ski length in cm)
         Pilot Freeride Model (ski length)                                                 Scrambler HOT            182            174        166               158+150
         Scrambler HOT           182          174             166          158+150         Scrambler 9              182            174        166               158+150
         Scrambler 8             175          165             155            145           Scrambler 8              175            165        155                 145
         Scrambler 7                          165             155            145           Scrambler 7              175            165        155                 145
         Siam 10                              174             166          158+149         Siam 10                                 174        166               158+150
         Siam 7                  174          164             154            144           Siam 7                   174            164        154                 144
         *2004-2005 models are listed in the 2005-2006 Salomon Shop Practices Manual.

          Powder Option
                                                 Installation with S914, S912 &           The Powder Strap consists of a         be removed), with the cord loop
          A                                      S810 Bindings                            cord loop and a removable rib-         extending from the rear of the heel.
                                                 The Powder Leash is for use in           bon strap.                             Clip the ribbon strap to the cord
                                                 powder conditions and is designed        To install the Powder Strap, insert    loop and place the strap under the
                                                 to be used with S914, S912, S810         the rectangular piece of the cord      bottom of the skier’s pants for use
                                                 model bindings. Fig. A                   loop under the binding heel base-      in powder conditions.
                                                                                          plate (the binding heel will need to

          Jig Use With Extra Large Boot Soles
         Occasionally a boot sole is too         3. Measure the length of the sole        6. Move the jig forward of the         8. Install the bindings. (Verify that
         large to fit a jig. In this instance,      that extends over the toe arrow          mid-sole the same distance as          screw penetration will not ex-
         the following procedure should             (viewed from the underside) of           measurement A and drill the toe        ceed hole depth.)
         be used to allow correct mount-            the jig.                                 holes.
         ing of the binding:                     4. Divide this length in half (mea-      7. Re-align the jig’s mid-sole mark     REFERENCE
                                                                                                                                  Page #        Section Name
         1. Open the jig to its fully extend-       surement A).                             to the ski’s mid-sole mark.
                                                                                                                                  8             Jig Selection & Use
            ed position.                         5. Place the fully extended jig onto        Move the jig backwards from
                                                                                                                                  9             Drilling, Tapping & Glue
         2. Place the boot heel into the jig        the ski with the boot mid-sole           the mid-sole mark the same
                                                                                                                                  15            Release Value Selection &
            against the heel guide.                 mark aligned with the mid-sole           distance as measurement A and                      Adjustment
                                                    mark on the ski.                         drill the heel holes.                15            Requested Settings

          Competition Bindings > Intended Use                                                                                     PARTS
                                                                                                                                  Reference #   Item Name

         Salomon distributes competition         tion needs. If these bindings are        Refer to Requested Settings for         000902        Salomon Adjustment Tool
         bindings to racers and coaches.         used by recreational skiers, there       instructions for skiers request-        001023        Adult Binding Paper Jig
         These bindings are intended to be       is a far greater risk of injury due to   ing settings not recommended by         001056        Salomon Powder Option
         used by skiers with special reten-      the use of more powerful springs.        Salomon.                                887528        Poweraxe Paper Jig
BINdINg                                               retaIl systems > InstallatIon > 1

INSTALLATION > Model-specific installation (continued)
 ZZ Speed 2 Interface
 Installation of the 914 LAB, 916 LAB, 920 LAB bindings
WARNINg: The 914 LAB, 916 LAB, and 920 LAB are the only bindings that should be installed on the ZZ interface
 A                                        S                                       D                                                F

                                                                                                                                                                                 STEP 2
 Assembly                                of the toe piece. Press firmly into
                                                                                  G                                                H
                                         place. Fig. D
Measure boot sole length in mm and
then break the yellow plastic ZZ blade   Attach the appropriate lifter shim,
spacer (Fig. A) at the appropriate       (yellow = 2 mm, black = 1 mm). do
length (the resulting spacer should      not add more than 5 mm of lifters.
include the last tab which matches
the boot length).                         Mounting
Slide the blade spacer onto the ZZ       Select a ski with the correct size ZZ                                                   Check the forward pressure: the ZZ
                                                                                 Verify that the height suits FIS
blade until it rests against the black   interface place (S, M, or L) for the                                                    plate system uses a unique forward
                                                                                 norm limits (50-55 mm).
base plate. Make sure the metal          boot sole length by referring to the                                                    pressure system. To move the heel,
                                         ZZ Speed 2 Installation Chart.          Install the brake.                              turn the forward pressure screw, sit-
blade is properly seated in spacer.
                                         Align the binding assembly on the                                                       uated directly below the DIN adjust-
Insert the end of the blade spacer
                                         ZZ interface using the screw posi-
                                                                                  Adjustment                                     ment screw. The forward pressure
into the recessed area on the bottom
                                         tion number code (1 or 2) found in      Place boot into binding system and              is correct when 3 mm of the screw
of the toe piece base plate. Fig. S
                                         the ZZ Speed 2 Installation Chart.      adjust the toe as usual.                        shaft is visible between the screw
Insert the post of the ZZ blade lock                                                                                             head and binding housing. Fig. H
                                         Fig. F
plate between the rear two screws
                                         Tighten the toe screws in a criss-
                                         cross pattern.                           NOTE
  ZZ Speed 2 installation                Verify that the heel track is posi-      Installing either the S916 LAB or S914 LAB on the 2005-2006 ZZ interface
Boot sole Size       Screw Position                                               requires a slightly different approach to assembly and mounting. Assembly:
                                         tioned correctly. The end of the         the yellow plastic blade spacer has letter codes corresponding to the boot sole
 length Letter
  (mm)    Code        1         2        metal ZZ blade should be 3 mm            length and must be broken at the appropriate tab. Make a note of this letter.
                                         forward of the end of the stainless      The rest of the assembly is the same. Mounting begins by aligning the binding
 265-297     S     265-282 283-297       steel heel track. Fig. G                 assembly’s center mark (arrow on the yellow blade spacer) to the corresponding
 298-327     M     298-311 312-327                                                letter code on the interface before tightening the toe screws and continuing with
                                         Tighten the heel screws in a criss-
 328-343     L      (N/A) 328-343                                                 the rest of the mounting and adjustment as with current models.
                                         cross pattern.

 ITF Free & Fast Interface Installation
For instructions on mounting and adjusting ITF (Installation Tool Free) Systems, consult the 2005-2006 Salomon Shop Practices Manual.

 Special Brakes
Special Carving brakes are available with 115 mm long arms and large
brakes. Consult the Salomon Spare Parts Catalog.
                                                                                  Recommendations for Carving Brakes
                                                                                  Carving Brakes ref. 78576001-78574601-78574701 => Length Arms = 115 mm
                                                                                       *Maximum weight authorized                                  3,800 kg
                                                                                       *Maximum height authorized                                   65 mm
                                                                                       *Minimum height authorized                                   48 mm
                                                                                  *Weight and height indicated for one half unit for skiing = 1 ski + 1 binding + 1 interface.

 Powerplate Junior
                                         Compatible with Quadrax bind-           toe and heel pieces (4Nm torque)                 313-341 mm
 A                                       ings (all range) and Driver binding     in the corresponding position on                 333-361 mm
                                         range 04-05 only. Fig. A                junior interface:                                353-381 mm
                                         Mounting                                253-281 mm                                       Mount the brake following the
                                         According to the boot sole length       273-301 mm                                       usual procedure.
                                         selected, tighten the screws on the     293-321 mm
         BINdINg                                                 retaIl systems > adjustment > 1


          Heel Position / Forward Pressure
         A                                     S                                       D

         Adjustment Tab Models.                end of the heel housing Fig. A or       position. Fig. D Re-insert the
         (All current retail models) Check     when the arrow of the rear of the       boot and check the adjustment.
         that the tip of the boot sole is      heel housing lines up within the
         flush against the butt plate of       scribed area on the adjustment
         the toe piece (or central roller of   tab. Fig. S If this adjustment is
         applicable models). The forward       incorrect, remove the boot from

         pressure is correct when the ar-      the binding, lift the adjustment tab
         row on the adjustment tab lines       using a Salomon Adjustment Tool
         up within the scribed area at the     and slide the heel to the desired

          Toe Cup Width
         F                                     G                                       H

                Correct                           Incorrect

         Independent Wing                      three points: the butt plate and        simultaneously. Adjust the wings     norm boots. (The added width of
         Adjustment Models.                    the low friction inserts in each        snugly against the boot sole. do     an adult norm boot sole some-
         The adjustment screws for mod-        wing arm.                               not over tighten. The toe cup ad-    what limits the shock absorption
         els with independent wing adjust-     Simultaneous Wing                       justment is correct when there are   capability of the C305. It is sug-
         ments are located on each side of     Adjustment Models.                      three points of contact: the butt    gested that aggressive junior ski-
         the toe piece. Adjust each wing                                               plate and the low friction inserts   ers with an adult norm boot sole
                                               (S914, S912, S810, S850 Models
         snugly against the boot sole so                                               on each wing arm.                    use a model designed exclusively
                                               and their predecessors). The ad-
         that the boot is centered over the                                            Automatic Wing                       for adult norm boots.)
                                               justment screw for models with
         ski. Fig. F do not over tighten       simultaneous wing adjustments is        Adjustment Models.
         Fig. G as it forces the boot          located on the left of the toe piece.   Spheric Sport and Quadrax model
         backward, increasing the forward      Fig. H By turning this screw,           toe wings adjust automatically.
         pressure. When properly adjusted,     both toe wings adjust                   The C305 adjusts automatically to
         the toe contacts the boot sole at                                             accept either children’s or adult

          Toe Height
                                               All Salomon retail binding models       Manual Models.                       gap of not more than 0.5 mm or
         J                                     must have a clearance of 0-0.5          Currently only the 914 bind-         until the boot sole just touches the
                                               mm between the AFD and boot             ing model features manual toe        AFD. You can use a Salomon 0.5
                                               toe. Fig. J                             height adjustment. Raise the toe     mm toe height adjustment card to
                                               Automatic Wing                          by turning the adjustment screw,     gauge this clearance. do not over
                                               Adjustment Models.                      located on top of the toe piece,     tighten. (Always re-check the
                                               Toe height adjusts automatically        counterclockwise. Pull the boot      forward pressure adjustment after
                                               on all current automatic wing           back to create a gap between the     making any toe cup adjustments.)
                                               adjustment binding models (Z12          boot sole and the binding AFD.
                                               to 305).                                Adjust the toe height to create a    REFERENCE
                                                                                                                            Page #   Section Name
                                                                                                                            15       Release Value Selection &
                                                                                                                            34       AFD Replacement
BINdINg                                            retaIl systems > release value > 1

 determining Skier Type
It is the skier’s responsibility to determine Skier                             TyPE 1 “Cautious skiing at               TyPE 3 “Aggressive skiing at
Type. Skier Type is not the same as skier ability                               LOWER visual indicator settings”         HIgHER visual indicator settings”
                                                                                • Prefer slow to moderate speeds.        • Prefer fast speeds.
and the two should not be confused. Skier Type                                  • Prefer gentle to moderate ter-         • Prefer steep terrain.
must be indicated on the workshop form or rental                                  rain.                                  • Receive higher than average vi-
form by the skier. The Skier Classification Chart                               • Receive lower than average vi-           sual indicator settings. This may
                                                                                  sual indicator settings. This may        reduce the likelihood of release
is available in small and large poster size versions                              increase the risk of inadvertent         in a fall in order to decrease the
from Salomon and should be displayed to assist                                    binding release in order to in-          risk of inadvertent binding re-
customers in classifying themselves.                                              crease the likelihood of release         lease.
                                                                                  in a fall.                             If from experience, you have been
                                                                                • Type 1 settings apply to “entry-       dissatisfied with visual indicator
                                        What type of skier are you?               level skiers uncertain of their        settings resulting from your se-
                                        determining your SKIER TyPE is            classification”.                       lected skier type classification, you
                                        your responsibility! Your skier         TyPE 2 “Moderate skiing at               may wish to consider: (a) chang-
                                        type, height, weight, age and ski       AVERAgE visual indicator set-            ing your skier type classification;
                                        boot sole length are used by the        tings”                                   (b) selecting different skier type
                                        shop to determine the visual indi-      • Prefer a variety of speeds.            classifications for toe and heel
                                        cator settings of your ski bindings.    • Prefer varied terrain.                 components; (c) selecting skier
                                        Be sure to provide accurate infor-      • Type 2 skiers are skiers who do        Types -1 ("for skiers who desire
                                        mation, as any error may increase          not meet all the descriptions of      visual indicator settings lower than
                                        your risk of injury. Consult these         Type 1 or Type 3 skier types.         settings for a Type 1 skier") or 3+
                                        descriptions to select your clas-                                                ("for skiers who desire visual indi-
                                        sification:                                                                      cator settings higher than settings
                                  These descriptions are compatible with ASTM and ISO documents.                         for a Type 3 skier").

                                                                                                                                                                 STEP 4
 Requested Settings
Skiers Requesting Settings Not Recommended by Salomon
                                                                                 Release Agreement
The 2006/2007 Salomon Adjustment Chart is the only release adjustment
chart authorized for use by Salomon dealers during the 2006/2007 sea-           I,
son. Salomon recognizes a skier’s right to choose settings outside those        hereby acknowledge that I have been advised by the
recommended as per the current Salomon Adjustment Chart (particularly
when the skier’s preferred setting is also within the range of acceptable       (rental shop, sales department, etc.) that the setting which I have
                                                                                requested for my bindings (Model                                             )
If the skier requests a setting other than the one derived from the current
                                                                                is not the setting recommended by the manufacturer of the bindings for
Salomon Adjustment Chart, the shop may:
                                                                                a skier of my height, weight, age and skier type. I understand that as a
• Adjust the system to individual requests IF the technician notes on
                                                                                condition of obtaining this setting on the bindings at the time of their de-
   the workshop or rental form the reason the higher or lower setting
                                                                                livery, I must agree to forever release the shop, its employees and agents,
   was requested. The customer must verify the request for the higher or
                                                                                the manufacturer, and the distributor from any and all liability for injury
   lower settings by signing and dating the form by the noted reason of
                                                                                or death which results to me or others from the use of these bindings. I
   the setting request. (It is suggested that the shop have the skier sign a
                                                                                acknowledge that there may be increased risk of injury or death to me as
   release identical to the Release Agreement printed on this page. The
                                                                                a result of my own personal preference for binding setting, particularly in
   release must then be attached to the completed workshop or rental
                                                                                view of the inherent and other risks of the sport of skiing. I hereby waive
   form.) NOTE: Current Salomon workshop and rental forms include a
                                                                                all claims arising from the use of the bindings and release from all liabil-
   "Requested Settings" option for customer requested settings, which
                                                                                ity the shop, the distributor and the manufacturer, their agents and em-
   eliminates the need for a separate release in such instances.
                                                                                ployees and I further agree to indemnify them from any and all liability or
• Adjust the system to the setting derived from the Salomon Adjustment
                                                                                harm or damage of any kind whatsoever which may result from the use of
   Chart and instruct the skier on how to change the setting.
                                                                                these bindings by myself or anyone I allow to use the bindings.
                                                                                I, the undersigned, have read and understand this liability release agree-
                                                                                ment, and agree that it is binding upon me, my heirs, guardians, adminis-
                                                                                trators, assigns, and legal representatives.

                                                                                Skier Signature
                                                                                (or, in the case of a minor, that of the skier’s parent or guardian)

                                                                                Shop Manager’s Signature
         BINdINg                                             retaIl systems > release value > 1

          2006/2007 Salomon Adjustment Chart
         All current model Salomon
         bindings use the DIN
         adjustment scale. Release
         setting numbers on this
         scale are referred to as
         “visual indicator set-
         tings.” Some older model
         Salomon bindings were
         manufactured prior to the
         establishment of the DIN
         standard scale and use
         a different adjustment
         scale. Refer to previous
         Shop Practices Manuals to
         adjust these models.
         The 2006/2007
         Adjustment Chart is the
         only release adjustment
         chart authorized for
         Salomon dealers during

         the 2006/2007 season.
         Only those settings
         recommended by Salomon
         should be used when de-
         termining the appropriate
         adjustment for each skier’s
         system. Refer to Skier’s
         Requesting Settings
         Not Recommended by
         Salomon (page 15) for
         skiers requesting other

          determining & Adjusting Visual Indicator Settings
         The following procedure is used for         • For Type -1 skiers, move up on       5. The box at the intersection of the     Visual Indicator Setting Adjustment
         determining visual indicator set-             the chart one row.                      skier’s boot sole length column        Adjust both toes and heels of the
         tings using the 2006/2007 Salomon           • For Type 3+ skiers, move down           and the Skier’s Code row shows         system to the visual indicator setting
         Adjustment Chart.                             on the chart three rows.                the initial visual indicator setting   derived from the adjustment chart.
         1. Find the Skier’s Code. Locate the        • A skier may select different skier      for the skier. If the intersection     Sometimes a technician may experi-
            skier’s weight and height in the           types for toe and heel piece.           of the row and column falls in a       ence difficulty determining exactly
            first two columns. If the skier’s     3. For skiers age 9 and younger or           blank box, move left or right on       where the visual indicator should
            weight and height are not in the         age 50 and older, move up the             the same row to the nearest box        appear in the binding’s visual indica-
            same row, select the Skier’s code        chart one row.                            showing a visual indicator setting.    tor window. For example, a setting of
            that is closest to the top of the        • For skiers 29 lbs. and under, no     6. Record the visual indicator set-       51/2 is not precisely marked on the
            chart.                                     further correction is appropriate.      tings on the Workshop Form.            binding. The technician should use
         2. The skier’s code is appropriate for      • For skiers 38 lbs. and under,           • If a skier selects different skier   those values that are clearly marked
            Type 1 skiers:                             Skier Type -1 is inappropriate.            types for toe and heel piece, it    on the binding as reference points
            • For Type 2 skiers, move down        4. Locate the column that represents            must be recorded on the work-       and set the release adjustment as
               on the chart one row.                 the skier’s boot sole length (in             shop or rental form in the order    close as possible to the setting that
            • For Type 3 skiers, move down           mm).                                         toe/heel (T/H), using a (/) to      is recorded on the Workshop Form.
               on the chart two rows.                                                             separate the two types.
BINdINg                                         retaIl systems > fInal checkIng > 1

While anyone can mount and adjust a Salomon binding, to receive indemnification from Salomon a Salomon
Certified Technician must sign or initial the Workshop Form attesting that all systems inspections have been
performed. A Final Check is your quality control measure to verify that all required procedures have been
properly completed.

 Visual Inspection of System Components

 Common Compatibility Problems
The Boot                                                                         The Ski
• Inconsistencies with ISO and          • Debris lodged in the sole.             • Mounting screws protruding           • Delaminated topskin.
  applicable norms.                     • Warped or improperly canted              through the base.                    • Pre-drilled holes. As a general
• Gross irregularities where the          boot sole.                             • Delaminated sidewall. This can         rule, bindings should not be
  boot contacts the binding and         • Cut-outs in the sole that                be detected visually or by run-        installed on skis that have previ-
  the AFD.                                impede proper brake function.            ning your fingers along the sides      ously been drilled for three or
• Unacceptable low grade                  (If you are uncertain of boot            of the ski.                            more sets of bindings.
  thermoplastic construction.             compatibility, perform the Clean       • Binding baseplates not flush with
• Rubber and/or metal tip                 vs. Lubricated Test. Boots that          ski surface.
  protectors                              fail this test or violate any of the
• Mold flashings.                         above points should not be used        The Ski Brake
• Excessive wear.                         with any Salomon binding.)             • Improper brake arm length.           • Strength of ski brake. A brake
                                                                                 • Improper installation.                 must not compress totally when
The Binding Components                                                           • Broken entry pedals.                   the ski is set on a flat surface.
• Stripped, loose or                    • Stripped or jammed toe height          • Bent or broken brake arms.           • Other visible wear.
  missing screws.                         and cup adjustment screws.
• Condition of the AFD (ripped,         • Jammed release adjustment               Visual Inspection of the Complete System
  loose, imbedded dirt, boot sole         screw.
                                                                                 Place the boot in the binding and check the accuracy of:
  pattern, tread imprint, etc.).        • Other visible wear.
                                                                                 • Toe height adjustment              • Forward pressure adjustment.
• Condition of anti-friction inserts    • Improperly installed leash
                                                                                   (if applicable).                   • Visual indicator settings.
  (where applicable).                     or brake.
                                                                                 • Toe cup width adjustment           • Symmetrical mounting of bind-
• Missing or unreadable visual          • Irregular heel track function.
                                                                                   (if applicable).                     ings to ski center line (1 mm).
  indicators and missing windows.       • Bent or broken baseplate, track
                                                                                 • Central roller adjustment            This should be in the same loca-
• Bent or broken baseplate,               or heel.
                                                                                   (if applicable).                     tion on both skis.
  principal axis or housing.

                                                                                                                                                               STEP 5
 Test for Elastic Travel & Return                                                 Test for Boot/Binding Compatibility
                                                                                 Check the boot/binding combination to ensure all components are com-
 A                                        S                                      patible. Unless a binding is specifically designed for use with both junior
                                                                                 and adult norm boot soles, adult and junior systems cannot be combined,
                                                                                 e.g., junior boots with adult bindings or vice versa. If the system passes
                                                                                 this test, mark “Pass” (√) on the Workshop Form for “Test of Boot-
                                                                                 Binding Compatibility.”
                                                                                 If you are not sure that the boot complies with standards or if you are not
                                                                                 sure that the system components are compatible, see Troubleshooting.
Secure the ski. Hit the forefoot area of the boot with an object that will not
damage the boot, such as a rubber hammer. Fig. A Use sufficient force
to move the boot off-center, but not hard enough to release the system.
The boot should move off-center at least 5 mm and return to center
within 2 mm of its original position.
Depress the heel lever while pulling forward on the upper cuff of the boot
until the boot heel lifts at least 5 mm. Fig. S Release both hands simul-
taneously. The boot should return to the ski quickly and smoothly. This
inspection can be performed either manually or by using a mechanical
testing device. If a testing device is used, follow the recommendations of                                               REFERENCE
                                                                                                                         Page #   Section Name
the test device manufacturer for proper procedure.
                                                                                                                         53       Standard Boot Sole
If the system passes these tests, mark “Pass” (√) on the Workshop                                                                 Dimensions
Form for “Test for Elastic Travel & Return”. If the system fails, see                                                    19       Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting.                                                                                                         21       Salomon Workshop Form
          BINdINg                                                                 retaIl systems > testIng > 1

          It is a requirement* for Salomon indemnification that all ski/binding/boot systems be verified using a force
          or torque measuring device.**
          A previously damaged binding component or boot may break during the added stress of mechanical testing.
          Consumers should be advised of this possibility prior to any mechanical testing of their equipment.

           Twist Test & Forward Lean Tests > Release Value Within Specified Range

           Twist Test (Toe)
                                                   Examples of Middle                      Sample Systems Inspection Ranges
           A                                       Quantitative Values                     Based on Skier Code "L"

                                                     3 Maximum             Middle           x                      43
                                                       Release       Quantitative Value

                                                                                                                           INSPECTION RANgE
                                                       Values           (Test Result)                              50

                                                                                                                                              IN-USE RANgE
                                                      45, 40, 50             45             REF                    58
                                                      60, 50, 50             50
                                                      30, 40, 45             40                                    67
                                                      55, 65, 60             60             x                      78

          Exercise the toe by releasing it once    two measured values are the same,       as determined from the Salomon                                    inspection range, you may have an
          in each direction. Measure and           there is no need to take a third mea-   Adjustment Chart. See Sample                                      installation error or an incompatible
          record the test result for both clock-   surement. See Examples of Middle        Systems Inspection Ranges                                         boot. This is known as asymmetric
          wise and counterclockwise directions     Quantitative Values (above)             (above).                                                          release. Troubleshoot the system and
          Fig. A with a force or torque-mea-       The toe passes this inspection if       If your test results for clockwise and                            re-test after the problem has been
          suring device. The test result is the    the test results in both directions     counterclockwise release appear                                   corrected.
          middle quantitative value of three       fall within the “Inspection Range”      to be at opposite extremes of the
          measured release values. If the first

           Forward Lean Test (Heel)
                                                   Exercise the heel by releasing it       the appropriate inspection range,
           S                                       once. Measure and record the            mark “Pass” (√) on the Workshop
                                                   test result using a force or torque     Form for “Release Value Within
                                                   measuring device. Fig. S The            Specified Range.”
                                                   test result should be within the
                                                   “Inspection Range.” If both twist
                                                   and forward lean results fall within

                                                                                                                                                              Page #   Section Name

                                                                                                                                                              16       2006/2007 Salomon
                                                                                                                                                                       Adjustment Chart
                                                                                                                                                              19       Troubleshooting
                                                                                                                                                              21       Salomon Workshop Form
           Results Not Within the Specified Range
          If the Twist Test or Forward             is not necessary to record any of       cording to Salomon’s recommen-                                      *U.S. Dealers only; recommended
          Lean Test results are not within         the test results on the Workshop        dations in this manual, he or she                                      for Canadian Dealers.
          the “Inspection Range” but are           Form. It is only necessary to re-       must sign the Workshop Form.                                       **For Salomon indemnification to
          within the greater “In-Use Range,”       cord whether the system passed          (The signing technician must be                                        apply, the shop must follow the
                                                                                                                                                                  test device
          the visual indicator of the com-         or failed each inspection and the       currently certified by Salomon.)                                       manufacturer’s requirements for:
          ponent affecting the test result         final visual indicator settings. Any                                                                         • Proper use.
          should be readjusted to bring the        system component that repeatedly                                                                             • Valid calibration.
          test result within the “Inspection       fails any inspection should not re-                                                                          • Calibration check at recommend-
          Range.” If the test result is out-       main in use. When the technician                                                                               ed intervals.
          side the “In-Use Range,” refer to        is satisfied that all required proce-                                                                        • Consistent results between tech-
          Troubleshooting on page 19. It           dures have been completed ac-                                                                                  nicians operating this device.
BINdINg                                                                                retaIl systems > testIng > 1

 Boot/Binding systems wear with time. This is expected. Normal wear and/or fatigue of a system can be
 expected. If a system inspection indicates a system is not functioning as intended, the cause of the problem
 must be identified and corrective action should be taken.

 The first step is to re-examine                          tings. They should not exceed the        any excess lubricant. Perform the                          mark “Fail” (√) on this section of
 each component of the ski/bind-                          minimum or maximum setting and           Twist Test and Forward Lean Test                           the Workshop Form.*
 ing/boot system individually. If a                       should be set appropriately for          as done previously and record your                         If the customer refuses to have
 problem is found, e.g., stripped                         the skier. Re-test the system for        results. Next, compare the results                         work done that is necessary to
 toe height screw, out-of-standard                        Elastic Travel & Return. If the sys-     of the lubricated test with those of                       bring the system within standards,
 boot sole, improperly mounted                            tem fails this test, mark "Fail" (√)     the previously performed non-lu-                           or requests work that violates the
 binding, missing AFD, etc., proper                       on this section of the Workshop          bricated clean test. Plot the results                      recommendations of this man-
 Binding-to-Boot Adjustments can-                         Form.*                                   on the Compatibility Tables. If the                        ual, the technician should check
 not be made. No further work can                         If the system failed the Test For        results don’t fall within the shaded                       the box next to the statement
 be performed on the system. Mark                         Boot/Binding Compatibility, mark         “Pass” window on the table, the                            indicating out-of-standard com-
 “Fail” (√) on this section of the                        "Fail" (√) on this section of the        BOOT is incompatible with the                              ponents on the Workshop Form.
 Workshop Form.*                                          Workshop Form.* If you are not           binding and should not be used.                            A note should be made in the
 If the system failed the Test for                        sure that the boot complies with         Mark “Fail” (√) on the Workshop                            Comment section of the form de-
 Elastic Travel & Return, check                           the mandatory standards, or if you       Form.*                                                     scribing the problem and the skier
 that all boot/binding interfaces are                     are not sure that the boot/binding       If no problems have been found                             should be warned that continued
 clean, smooth and clear of debris.                       system components are compat-            with the system and the Release                            use of the system is inadvisable.
 If the boot is dirty, clean it with a                    ible, do a Clean vs. Lubricated          Value Within Specified Range                               The shop will not be indemnified
 solution of mild dish washing soap                       Test. To perform a Clean vs.             cannot be obtained, further tests                          for work done on that system.
 and water. If the binding is dirty,                      Lubricated Test, all adjustments         must be undertaken. First, switch
 clean it according to the proce-                         to the system, e.g., visual indicator    testers to check operator accuracy.
 dures described in Maintenance                           settings, forward pressure adjust-       Next, check the accuracy of the
 and Repair. Check that the boot                          ments, etc., must be the same as         testing device per the device man-                          Page #   Section Name
 enters the binding correctly. Make                       when the system was previously           ufacturer’s recommendations. Re-                            17       Test For Elastic Travel
 sure the boot is properly posi-                          tested. Lubricate the boot with a        test the system. If the system re-                                   and Return
 tioned in the toe and heel cups.                         mild dish washing soap wherever          leases outside the “In-Use Range,”                          17       Test For Boot/Binding
 Check the visual indicator set-                          it contacts the binding and wipe off                                                                          Compatibility
                                                                                                                                                               21       Salomon Workshop Form
 * The customer should be informed of, and authorize, action needed to correct the problem. Please refer to                                                    73       Salomon Retail Binding
   the Technical Reference section for warranty information on binding components covered under warranty.                                                               Limited Warranty

    Compatibility Tables: Clean vs. Lubricated Tests
    Twist Test                                                                                        Forward Lean Test
                      100                                                                                                           400                                                            S TEP 6
                           90                                                                                                       360

                           80                                                                                                       320

                                              Fail                                                                                  280
                                                                 Pass                                                               240
                           50                                                                                                       200
Lubricated Test

                                                                                                  Lubricated Test

                           40                                                                                                       160
                                                                                                                Forward Lean (Nm)

                           30                                                                                                       120

                                                                       Fail                                                         80
              Twist (Nm)

                           10                                                                                                       40
                            0                                                                                                        0
                                0   10   20    30    40    50     60    70    80    90 100                                                0   40   80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400
                                Twist (Nm)                                                                                                Forward Lean (Nm)
                                Clean Test                                                                                                Clean Test
           BINdINg                                           retaIl systems > record keePIng > 0

            Skier Instruction & Warning
           When the Certified Technician signs       recorded on the Workshop Form and          will release, and it is, therefore, no     • Understands that the bindings
           or initials the Workshop Form, the        have the customer verify that the          guarantee of the skier’s safety.             should be maintained as per
           technician attests that all proce-        settings recorded on the form agree        The Skier must then sign the                 suggestions in Maintenance
           dures have been completed. It is          with the settings appearing in the         Workshop Form, indicating the                guidelines prior to the beginning
           not necessary for the technician to       visual indicator window of the bind-       skier:                                       of each season and every 30 skier
           personally provide the skier with in-     ing. (It is not necessary to explain       • Has been instructed in the proper          days per year.
           structions as long as the shop does.      how these numbers are derived.)              use of the equipment.                    The person who signs the Workshop
           To help reduce your shop’s liability      Although skiers may work on their          • Has received the in-box pamphlet         Form should be the intended user of
           risk and to receive indemnification       own system, suggest that if a prob-          (new bindings only).                     the equipment. In the case of a mi-
           from Salomon, take the following          lem develops, the system should            • Has verified that the visual indicator   nor skier, the signature on the form
           steps whenever a skier picks up           be taken to a Salomon Authorized             settings correspond to the record-       must be that of the skier’s parent
           their equipment. (If the individual       Binding Dealer.                              ed settings on the Workshop Form.        or legal guardian. If someone other
           picking up the equipment is not the       Receipt of In-Box Instructions             • Has read and understands the spe-        than the skier or the skier’s parent
           intended user, treat that individual as   When a skier purchases a new                 cific information on the Workshop        or guardian picks up the equipment,
           though they were the intended user.       binding, it is required that they also       Form that releases the shop, manu-       this person should be treated as
           In the case of minor skiers, follow       receive the in-box pamphlet included         facturer and distributor from liabil-    though he or she were the skier and,
           these steps in the presence of both       in each binding box. The pamphlet            ity.                                     therefore, must sign the Workshop
           the minor skier and a parent or legal     should be reviewed with the skier so       • Understands that skiing involves         Form. A note must be placed on the
           guardian.)                                that it is fully understood.                 inherent risks and that injuries are     Workshop Form that the “agent”
           Explanation of Entry/Exit/Re-entry        Skier Signature on the                       a common and ordinary occurrence         must transmit the information to the
           The proper use of the system (entry,      Workshop Form                                of the sport.                            intended user. If a skier refuses to
           exit and re-entry) must be explained      The skier must read and under-             • Understands that included in the         sign the Workshop Form, Salomon
           using the skier’s own system as an        stand the conditions specified in the        Liability Release Agreement is the       will not provide indemnification and
           example.                                  Liability Release Agreement. Point           specific warning that the binding        the shop should consider refusing to
           Explanation of Parts and                  out that the skier is signing a release      will not release at all times or under   provide service to the skier.
           Release Adjustments                       of liability and that included in the        all circumstances where release          Receipt of Workshop Form
           Show the skier where the visual           release is a specific warning that           may prevent injury or death, nor is      The skier must be given a copy of
           indicator adjustment caps/screws          the binding will not release under           it possible to predict every situa-      the Workshop Form that includes a
           are located. Point out the binding-       all circumstances nor is it possible         tion in which it will release, and it    signed copy of the Liability Release
           to-boot adjustments. Indicate where       to predict every situation in which it       is, therefore, no guarantee of their     Agreement.
           the visual indicator settings are                                                      safety.

            Retail Record Keeping
           A Salomon authorized shop is              7. *Skier’s Code.                              d. Has read and understands the        14. If the visual indicator settings
           required to keep accurate records         8. *System inspection results                     Liability Release Agreement             vary from the recommended
           of work performed. Aside from the             ("Pass" or "Fail" for all functional          on the Workshop Form.                   setting, note the reason for this.
           legal reasons, accurate records pro-          tests must be indicated).                  e. Understands that there are              Attach a signed release to the
           vide a permanent history of the cus-      9. *Visual indicator settings.                    inherent and other risks in             Workshop Form. NOTE: Current
           tomers you have serviced over the         10. *Salomon Certified Technician’s               the sport of snow skiing and            Salomon workshop and rental
           years. Workshop records must be               initials or signature attesting               agrees to assume those risks.           forms include a "Requested
           kept for five years or for the statute        that all functional tests and              f. Understands that included               Settings" option for customer
           of limitations of the state or prov-          instructional procedures have                 in the Liability Release                requested settings, which elimi-
           ince, whichever period is longer.             been completed.                               Agreement is the specific               nates the need for a separate
           The following is a list of informa-       11. *Liability Release Agreement                  warning that the binding will           release in such instances.
           tion* that must be recorded every             which is either the same as/or                not release under all circum-       15. Refusal to serve statement. This
           time a Salomon binding is mounted             substantial equivalent of the                 stances where release may               statement should be written so
           and/or adjusted. It is not necessary          Salomon form.                                 prevent injury or death, nor            as to absolve the ski shop from
           to use a Salomon Workshop Form,           12. *Skier signature (or that of the              is it possible to predict every         any liability when the customer
           but any form that the shop uses               skier’s agent or, in the case of a            situation in which it will re-          refuses to have work performed
S TE P 7

           should include all the information            minor, that of the skier’s parent             lease, and it is, therefore, no         as per guidelines of Salomon
           listed below.*                                or guardian) attesting that the               guarantee of their safety.              and the shop
           1. *Date of transaction.                      skier:                                     g. Understands that bindings
           2. *Name and address of the skier.            a. Has been instructed in the                 should be maintained as per          NOTE
           3. *Skier’s height, weight, age and              proper use of the equipment.               suggestions in Maintenance           * Without this information, indemni-
                                                         b. Has received the in-box pam-               Guidelines.                            fication will not apply.
                skier type.
           4. *Skis (brand, model and serial                phlet (new bindings only).          13. Notes on the boot sole’s ma-            REFERENCE
                number).                                 c. Has verified that the visual            terial, shape and/or condition          Page #    Section Name

           5. *Boot (brand, model and sole                  indicator settings correspond           should be made when neces-              21        Salomon Workshop Form
                length).                                    to the recorded visual indica-          sary.                                   21        Liability Release
                                                            tor settings.                                                                             Agreement
           6. *Binding (brand and model).
                                                                                                                                            33        Maintenance Guidelines
BINdINg                  retaIl systems > record keePIng > 1

Salomon Workshop Form*

                                                                                             S T EP 7

                                    NOTE                           Reference #   Item Name

                                                                   B10059 (U.S. only)
                                    *U.S. form shown.
                                                                          Workshop Form
                                    REFERENCE                      B10008 (Can. Bilingual)
                                    Page #   Section Name                 Workshop Form
                                    20       Skier Instruction &   B10009 (Can. English)
                                             Warning                      Workshop Form

Proper procedures for
a Salomon Certified
Technician to follow
while mounting and
adjusting Salomon
Rental and Demo
BINdINg                                                          rental & demo > PreParatIon 

For general Preparation Instructions, please refer to page 6.
All rental skis must have an Identification Number and a method to record maintenance and testing informa-
tion (e.g., Salomon sample Ski/Binding Maintenance Record and Boot Maintenance Record).

                                                                                                                                                                                                    STEP 1
 Boot-to-Binding Compatibility
Bindings are designed to be used with specific norm boot soles, i.e., ju-           an adult binding. The C305 and S305 are designed for use with junior
nior norm boot soles with junior bindings and adult norm boot soles with            norm boot soles and smaller adult norm boot soles.
adult bindings. Under no circumstances should a junior boot be used with

 Jig Selection

                                                                                                                                                                                                    STEP 2
Two jigs are needed to mount          customer service representative
current model Salomon rental          for additional jigs to mount older
                                                                                     Rental Jig Selection Chart
                                                                                                                   Jig Ref. #
bindings. The jigs can be used for    models of Salomon rental bind-

                                                                                                                                       80 - 123 mm
both Synchro and non Synchro          ings.                                                                                                                  Boot Sole

                                                                                                                 56 - 99 mm
                                                                                                                                        Wide skis
                                                                                                                                                                             Synchro Pre-Sets

                                                                                                                  Ski width
                                                                                    Models         din Scale                                                  Range
Systems. Please refer to the          See Jig Selection & Use on                                                                                               (mm)
Rental Jig Selection Chart (right)    page 8 for more information.
for the reference numbers.
                                                                                    Z12 Ti SC        4 to 12                                                 260 - 382     Toe height & Toe wings
See page 25 for Synchro pre-                                                        Z12 SC           4 to 12                                                 260 - 382     Toe height & Toe wings
set requirements. Contact your         REFERENCE                                    Z10 Ti SC        3 to 10                                                 260 - 382

                                                                                                                   Jig Ref. # 001003

                                                                                                                                         Jig Ref. # 001040
                                       Page #     Section Name
                                                                                    710 SC           3 to 10                                                 260 - 382
                                       7          Boot-to-Binding
 PARTS                                            Compatibility                     609 SC           2.5 to 9                                                260 - 382
 Reference #   Item Name               8          Jig Selection & Use               609 SR           2.5 to 9                                                230 - 308
 001156 Adult Retail Jig               9          Drilling, Tapping & Glue          608 SC           2 to 7.5                                                260 - 382
 001003 Rental Jig                     25         Rental Visual &                   607 SR            2 to 7                                                 230 - 308
 001040 Rental Jig Wide Skis                      Mechanical Inspections            305 SC         0.75 to 4.5                                               216 - 304
 78313301 Extralight Jig               28         Maintenance Records               305 SR         0.75 to 4.5                                               190 - 246

The Salomon Synchro System is designed to sim-                                      Setup efforts of the system are minimal, since the
plify rental operations. The system eliminates the                                  only extra step for Synchro setup is the placement
need to place a boot in the binding to make adjust-                                 of Synchro Sizing Stickers on all boots. Models
ments, resulting in increased overall efficiency. It                                released since 2004-2005 no longer even require
is possible to reduce the amount of time spent on                                   sizing stickers – the boot sole length (in mm) is
adjusting each system by up to 40.                                                 used instead.
There are two basic types of           LEgENd
Synchro System bindings: SC and
SR. While both have a moveable
heel piece, only the SC (Synchro
Center) models have a moveable
toe, allowing both the toe and heel
piece to be adjusted to “center”
the boot.
To set up the Synchro Systems,
you will need: Salomon rental bind-
ings with Synchro Heel Guides and
the parts listed below

 Reference #   Item Name
 001156 Adult Retail Jig
 001003 Rental Jig
 001191 Wide Sizes Rental Sticker
 006017 SC Synchro Sizing Stickers          Heel Track           Visual Indicator      Adjustment          Toe Cup                                            Adjustment            Brake Arm
                                            Adjustment           Heel Lever            Range               Toe Height                                         Screw                 Heel Housing
 006016 SR Synchro Sizing Stickers                                                     Indicators
 001189 Salomon Boot Sole                   Loop                 Heel Cup                                  Adjustment                                         Toe Length            Baseplate
                                            Adjustment                                 Spheric Pedal/      Screw                                              Adjustment
        Measuring Device                                         Brake Pedal           AFD                                                                    Screw                 Lubrication
 000902 Rental Adjustment Tool              Screw                                                          Visual Indicator                                                         Point*
                                      * Use Salomon grease (Ref. #000905) on track.
         BINdINg                                                    rental & demo > InstallatIon > 

         INSTALLATION > Salomon Synchro System & e                                                                2™
                                                                                                                       Ski/Boot/Binding System
          Salomon Synchro System
          A                                        S                                        D                                       F

          G                                        H                                        J                                       K

         SR Models (non-moveable toe) are         Next, place the jig properly on the      2004/2005 and later Synchro             range, look for the matching yel-
         mounted using the Retail procedures.     ski, drill the ski and remove any        Center Systems use color-coded          low rectangles (296 mm, 304 mm,
         Non-Synchro System Follow Synchro        shavings. Place a drop of glue onto      adjustment range indicators.            307 mm) on the heel track cover.
         System procedures, omitting mea-         the drilled holes. On SC (moveable       Simply read the boot sole length in     Pre-2004 Synchro Systems
         surement of boots and affixing           toe) model bindings, mount the toe       mm’s (stamped on the side of the        Older Synchro systems require the
         Synchro Stickers.                        plate securely with the four screws      boot sole) and move the toe to the      use of Synchro Sizing Stickers which
                                                  provided Fig. A. Move the adjust-        corresponding mm length range           give an alpha-numeric code for each
         SC Models (moveable toe) are
                                                  ment lever on the front of the toe to    position Fig. G. Each range is indi-    boot size . Measure all boots in in-
         mounted using the procedures de-
                                                  the left and continue to slide the toe   vidually color coded.                   ventory with the Salomon Boot Sole
         scribed below.
                                                  onto the plate Fig. S.                                                           Measuring Device (Ref. #001189)
         First, set the jig to the proper posi-                                            Then move the heel to the correct
                                                  Slide the central plate onto the toe     color coded mm length mark shown        Fig. J and affix the appropriate
         tion. It is imperative that the jig be
                                                  piece, Fig. D then position the heel     on the heel track cover Fig. H.         Synchro Sizing Sticker to each boot
         set correctly and all bindings be
                                                  over the central plate and holes,                                                (excluding short mounted Spheric
         mounted at the correct position. For                                              Color coding makes it easier to read.
                                                  Fig. F and tighten using a criss-                                                Propulse models) Fig. K.
         consistent mounting, drill the jig and                                            For example: when the toe is posi-
                                                  cross pattern.
         pin it in the correct position.                                                   tioned in the yellow (296 – 307 mm)

          e2™ Ski/Boot/Binding System
                                                                                                                                   e2™ BOOTS:
                                                                                                                                   • Thermic Fit liner, Sanitized lin-
                                                                                                                                     ing & sole (Rental)
                                                                                           SKIS (Snowtrip Rental):                 • Step-in strap
                                                                                           • Monocoque Composite dou-              • Oversize Sensifit
                                                                                             ble wall lite wood                    e2™ BINdINgS:
                                                                                           • Structure SFB-W (base & edge)         • Spheric
                                                                                           • Graphite HMW base                     • Vertical progressive pivot
                                                                                           • Pre-mounted rails                     • Automatic wing adjustment

          Mounting e2™ Components on Snowtrip Skis
          A                                        S                                        D a

                                                                           b                                      b
         Snowtrip skis are delivered pre-drilled with the heel track pre-mounted.
         Mounting the toe piece                   Lift the adjustment lever Fig. A         Length adjustment                       The back side of the adjustment
         Same procedure as the Retail Toe         and move the heel piece for-             Align the base of the side arrow        lever Fig. Da must be within the
         Piece (Quadrax) (page 10).               ward until the white arrow (left         Fig. Sa with the Mondopoint             white rectangle Fig. Db located on
                                                  side of the arch) is aligned with a      length that corresponds to the          the left side of the heel.
         Mounting the heel piece                  Mondopoint graduation.                   length marked on the boot Fig. Sb.      If the back side of the adjust-
         Remove the protective part from
                                                  Adjust the length according to                                                   ment lever Fig. Da is not in this
         the track.                                                                        Checking the forward pressure
                                                  the boot.                                                                        zone, move the heel piece forward
         Put the heel piece on the track                                                   Put the boot in the binding.
                                                                                                                                   or backward to obtain the proper
         from the rear.                                                                    Check the forward pressure.             adjustment.
BINdINg                                                   rental & demo > adjustments > 

 Toe Position                                                                  Toe Height
                                        the toe locks firmly in place. For    Automatic Models.                      turn the adjustment screw coun-
 A                                      S850 and other non-current SC         Sport/Quadrax toes have automatic      terclockwise until you see light
                                        models, push the toe back, de-        toe height adjustment.                 between the boot sole and the
                                        press the button on the left side     Micrometric Models.                    binding AFD. Turn the screw clock-
                                        of the toe, and slide the toe into    Raise the toe by turning the ad-       wise until the gap is no more than
                                        position. Fig. A The toe locks into   justment screw, located on top of      0.5 mm or preset for Synchro sys-
                                        place automatically. The adjust-      the toe piece counterclockwise.        tems using a preset toe height.*
Synchro Center Models. Move             ment is correct when the mid-sole     Pull the boot back and continue to
the button on the front of the toe      mark on the ski is aligned with the
to the left, and slide the toe to the   mid-sole mark on the boot.             Toe Cup Width
Synchro position indicated. Ensure
                                                                              Automatic Wing Adjustment              Simultaneous Wing Adjustment
 Heel Position / Forward Pressure                                             Models. Same as retail counter-        Models. Same as retail counter-
                                                                              parts (see page 14).                   parts (see page 14) or preset for
 S                                       D                                    Independent Wing Adjustment            Synchro systems using a preset
                                                                              Models. Same as retail counter-        toe width.*

                                                                                                                                                              STEP 3
                                                                              parts (see page 14) or preset for
                                                                              Synchro systems using a preset
                                                                              toe width.*
                                                                                                                      * Synchro Presets.
Finger Adjustment Models.               boot down and check the forward                                                 Micrometric toe heights, inde-
Lift the adjustment loop at the         pressure indicator. The silver tab     REFERENCE                                pendent and simultaneous wing
back of the heel and slide the          should be visible in the housing       Page #   Section Name                    adjustments can be preset using
                                                                               12       Pilot System Mounting &         a Standard Norm Boot Sole (page

                                                                                                                                                              STEP 4
heel forward to the Synchro posi-       window. Fig. D (It is not neces-
                                                                                        Adjustment                      53) for Synchro applications. A
tion indicated or until the binding     sary to put the boot in the binding    15       Release Value Selection &       dab of silicone caulk can then be
heel cup contacts the boot heel.        for Synchro applications.)                      Adjustment                      put into the slot of the adjustment
Fig. S Release the loop, push the                                              26       Pre-Season Inspections          screws to prevent tampering.

 2006/2007 Salomon Adjustment Chart

                                                                                                                                                              STEP 5
All current Salomon rental bindings must be adjusted according to the 2006/2007 Salomon Adjustment
Chart. This is the only release adjustment chart authorized for Salomon bindings during the 2006/2007
season. For a detailed description of the charts and procedures recommended by Salomon, please refer to
pages 15 & 16 of this Manual.

RENTAL VISUAL & MECHANICAL INSPECTION                                                                                                                         S TEP 6
 Rental Testing Overview
The mechanical inspections discussed in this section are required of U.S. dealers and are strongly recommended
for Canadian dealers, both in the interest of consumer protection and as a sound risk-management strategy.
Maintenance records must be kept for all bindings and boots in inventory for both pre-season and in-season
inspections. Only Pass/Fail results should be recorded. If bindings are switched from one pair of skis to another,
this should be noted on the records. To receive indemnification from Salomon, maintenance records must be kept
on file for five years or the statute of limitations in your state or province, whichever is longer.
Pre-Season Boot/Binding:                                                      In-Season Binding:
• Visually inspect and clean all boots and bindings in inventory.             • Random sampling inspection (including mechanical testing) must be
• Test all bindings with a mechanical testing device using selected refer-      preformed at specified intervals.
  ence boots.                                                                 • Sample size is dictated by the amount of equipment actually used.
• Test a sample of boots with a mechanical testing device using selected      • Half of sample is from actual systems used (ski/boot/binding system not
  reference bindings.                                                           readjusted and half of sample is from inventory (may be readjusted).
• Records all tests on the individual boot or ski/binding inventory logs as   • Test all sample units and classify each result as “Pass” “Class I”, “Class
  “Pass” or “Fail”.                                                             II”, or “Troubleshooting”.
                                                                              • Determine the schedule for further testing (and corrective action if nec-
                                                                              • Record all test results as “Pass” or “Fail”.
          BINdINg                                                            rental & demo > InsPectIon > 

           Rental Pre-Season Inspections
           Pre-Season Binding Inspections
          The purpose of pre-season rental inspections is to ensure that all com-         • Test for Lateral Elastic Travel and Return.
          ponents are functioning properly. Start by pre-selecting several samples        • Test for Vertical Elastic Travel and Return.
          representative of your rental boot inventory. These samples must pass all       • Verification That Release Values are Within Specified Range.
          visual inspections (see Final Checking & Visual Inspection, page 17)            Note: Any binding component that tests outside the “Inspection Range”
          and should be clean.                                                            should be inspected and re-tested. If the new results are still outside
          Select any setting in the mid-range of the visual indicator scale of            the “Inspection Range,” but within the “In-Use Range,” a correction
          the bindings and any appropriate boot sole length as shown on the               factor* must be applied to bring the mechanical test results within the
          2006/2007 Salomon Adjustment Chart and make all appropriate bind-               “Inspection Range.”
          ing to boot adjustments according to the Chart. If there are any preset         For any binding component that tests outside of the “In-use Range” refer
          or Synchro binding adjustments, verify their accuracy. All used bindings        to Troubleshooting.
          should be cleaned and lubricated before performing the following inspec-

           Pre-Season Boot Inspections
          Pre-season boot inspections verify that boots in inventory can be used          • If either the clean or lubricated test results fall outside the acceptable
          interchangeably with all appropriate bindings. Visually inspect all boots         ranges, re-inspect the boot, correct the defect, and re-test the boot.
          for compatibility and interchangeability according to criteria listed on          Remove from inventory any boot that does not pass both tests. Re-
          Preparation & Installation. Correct any boot compatibility defect(s) that         inspect, repair (if necessary) and test all suspect boots of the affected
          are found. If the defect cannot be corrected, the boot must be removed            cell.
          from inventory.                                                                 New or Unused Boots
          Used Boots                                                                      A single unit random sample typical of each boot cell (boots of the same
          A random sample of 5 (not less than 16 nor more than 80 units) of              make, model, year of manufacture and sole length) must be tested ac-
          inventory must be tested according to the following procedures. The             cording to procedures used for testing in the Used Boots section.
          sample should include one boot typical of each boot cell (a boot cell is
          defined as all boots of the same make, model, year of manufacture and
          sole length).                                                                    Pre-Season Boot Inspection Examples
          • Select two skis with bindings of the same model.                              The maximum and minimum “Clean 25” values           Sample Inspection Ranges
          • Adjust both bindings to release at their mid-range “Reference Value”          shown on this table are calculated by adding or sub-
                                                                                          tracting 25 of the Reference Value to or from the       x            37
            of the appropriate “Visual Indicator Setting” using a mechanical testing
                                                                                          Reference Value. Example: Reference Value (Twist) 50

                                                                                                                                                                     INSPECTION RANgE
            device with a typical boot in good condition of the appropriate Sample

                                                                                                                                                                                        CLEAN 25%
                                                                                          (shown on right).                                                     50

            Boot Sole Length.                                                             50 x 25 = 12.5 (rounded to 13).                                      58
          • Clean both bindings with mild dish washing soap and water at all boot         Maximum “Clean 25” is 50+13 = 63.
                                                                                          Minimum “Clean 25” is 50-13 = 37.                       x            63
            interface (contact) points and wipe them dry.
          • Label one binding “clean.”
                                                                                                Sample            Binding        Visual         Twist        Forward
          • Apply a thin film of mild dish washing soap to all boot interface points           Boot Sole           Type         indicator       (toe)         Lean
            of the other binding and label it “lubricated.”
                                                                                                                                                 37            145
          • Using a mechanical testing device, measure and record the Twist Test
            result (clockwise or counterclockwise) in one direction only and the                                                                 43            165

            Forward Lean Test result of the random sample boot in the “clean”                 271-290 mm           Adult           6             50            194

            binding.                                                                                                                             58            229

          • Measure and record the Twist Test result in both directions and the                                                                  63            243

            Forward Lean Test result of the random sample boot in the “lubricated”                                                               28            106
            binding.                                                                                                                             31            120
          • The test results of the lubricated test must be within the "Inspection
                                                                                              271-290 mm          Junior           4             37            141
            Range" for the appropriate setting.
                                                                                                                                                 43            165
          • The test results for the clean test must be within the “Clean 25” range
                                                                                                                                                 46            176
            for the appropriate setting.
                                                                                                                                                 23             90

           NOTE                                                                                                                                  27            102

           * A correction factor is determined       REFERENCE                                271-290 mm        Jr. & Child        3             31            120
                                                     Page #   Section Name
             by adjusting the binding com-                                                                                                       37            141
             ponent’s visual indicator scale at      53       Standard Boot Sole
                                                                                                                                                 39            150
             half-setting intervals to bring the              Dimensions
             binding component’s test result         17       Final Checking                                                                     14             52
             to within the “Inspection Range.”       17       Test for Elastic Travel &                                                          17             64
             This correction factor must then be              Return
             placed on the ski next to the affect-                                             < 250 mm            Child          2.25           20             75
             ed binding component (toe/heel)         18       Release Value Within
                                                                                                                                                 23             87
             and recorded in your ski/binding                 Specified Range
                                                                                                                                                 27            102
             maintenance records.                    19       Troubleshooting
BINdINg                                                       rental & demo > InsPectIon > 

 Rental In-Season Inspections
In-season inspections must be performed on random samples of rental inventory during the season to
ensure equipment is functioning properly. Any sampling program that gives every unit of inventory an
equal chance of being selected is valid. The purpose of random sampling is to detect, correct and prevent
deficiencies. Deficiencies (deviations) fall into the following categories:
deviations - Class I                   should all be corrected as they are      reference torque value. In-season                                                                                          • Sampling then continues nor-
Class 1 Deviations in torque test      discovered. However, do not prompt       sampling and inspection render oc-                                                                                           mally, i.e., after every 7 days,
results are results that are outside   an inspection of the entire inventory    currence of a Class III Deviation un-                                                                                        after every 14 days, etc.
the Inspection Range but within        unless these deviations exceed an        likely. Should a Class III Deviation                                                                                       Sample Criteria
the In-Use Range. These are minor      acceptable number per sample size,       be detected, all defects must be                                                                                           An equal number of units (single
deviations requiring no corrective     causing the sample to fail.              corrected or the affected product(s)                                                                                       ski/binding) must come from units
action unless these deviations ex-     By quickly identifying Class I           must be removed from inventory.                                                                                            that are “ready to rent” and units
ceed an acceptable number of the       Deviations, this random sampling         Detection of a Class III Deviation                                                                                         that are in “returned condition.”
sample tested. Please refer to the     method can prevent more serious          causes the sample to fail.                                                                                                 • Ready to rent units may be test-
“Sample Sizes” chart for the defini-   defects from occurring.                                                                                                                                               ed at any visual indicator setting
tions of these limits. Minor devia-                                                                                                                                                                          and boot.
                                       deviations - Class II
tions in excess of the allowable                                                                                       27
                                                                                                                                                                                                           • Returned condition units must
                                       Class II Deviations are minor de-
limit cause the sample to fail and                                                                                     31
                                                                                                                                                                                                             be tested at the visual indicator
                                       viations that prompt inspection                                           x     37
the entire appropriate inventory                                                                                                                                                                             setting and boot they are re-

                                                                                                                                                                                  dEVIATION – CLASS III…
                                       of the entire inventory and cor-

                                                                                                                                                           dEVIATION – CLASS II
                                                                                                                                     dEVIATION – CLASS I
                                                                                              INSPECTION RANgE

must be checked. Class 1 torque
                                                                               IN-USE RANgE

                                       rective action. Class II Deviations                                                                                                                                   turned with and in the condition

                                                                                                                 REF   50
deviations should then be correct-                                                                                                                                                                           as returned.
                                       are torque results that fall outside                                            58
ed using a Correction Factor as
                                       the “In-Use” range but not more                                           x     67                                                                                  Sample Size
explained in the note on page 26.
                                       than 3 horizontal rows up or down                                               78                                                                                  Sample size is 5 of inventory but
Other Class 1 Deviations such as
                                       from the reference torque value.                                                91                                                                                  not less than 16 nor more than 80
• failed test for elastic travel
                                       Whenever a Class II Deviation is                                                                                                                                    units. Sample size is based on av-
• improper ski brake operation
                                       detected, the source of the defect                                                                                                                                  erage daily output if rental output
• poor boot to binding contact                                                  Sample Frequency
                                       must be determined and all the                                                                                                                                      drops below 50 of capacity over
• incorrect forward pressure                                                    Random sampling is conducted
                                       appropriate inventory must be                                                                                                                                       the sampling period. See Sample
                                       checked for the defect. Defects          throughout the entire season.                                                                                              Sizes chart.
Sample Sizes                           must be corrected according to           Sampling frequency is as follows:
                         Maximum                                                                                                                                                                           Procedures & Recording
 inventory    Sample                   Troubleshooting or the affected          • Sampling is conducted after
                          Class 1                                                                                                                                                                          Samples are inspected according
    Size       Size                                                               7 days of operation.
                         deviations    product(s) must be removed from                                                                                                                                     to procedures used for pre-season
  (Pairs)     (Units)
                                                                                • If the sample passes, the next

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  STEP 5
                          (Units)      inventory. Detection of a Class II                                                                                                                                  binding inspections, however the
    100         16           3         Deviation causes the sample to fail.       sampling is taken after another
                                                                                                                                                                                                           twist test only needs to be per-
    200         20           4                                                    7 days of operation.
                                       deviations - Class III                                                                                                                                              formed in one direction (clockwise
    300         30           6                                                  • If two consecutive samples pass,
                                       Class III Deviations are major de-                                                                                                                                  or counterclockwise).
    400         40           8                                                    sampling frequency is every
                                       viations that prompt corrective ac-                                                                                                                                 Pass/Fail records of all inspections
    500         50          10                                                    14 days.
                                       tion and a review of all procedures.                                                                                                                                should be recorded for the individ-
    600         60          12                                                  • If a sample fails at any time,
                                       Class III Deviations are torque                                                                                                                                     ual Ski/Binding.
    700         70          14                                                    daily sampling is instituted until
                                       results that are more than 3 hori-
    800         80          16                                                    two consecutive samples pass.
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  S TEP 6
                                       zontal rows up or down from the
   2000         80          16

 demo Inspections > Incomplete Systems
Skis                                                                            boots of the pair must be inspected and the boot sole lengths of both
Bindings intended for demo applications, where customers supply their           boots verified.
own boots, must be inspected using the procedures described for rental          Boots
equipment. Whenever a demo or rental binding is used with a customer’s          Whenever customers rent boots for use with their own skis, the custom-
own boot, inspect the customer’s boot for Boot/Binding Compatibility as         er’s binding system must be mechanically inspected (using the rental
described on page 17. Reject any boots that fail visual inspection. Both        boot) according to procedures described for retail equipment.

                                                                                                                                                                                                            Page #   Section Name

                                                                                                                                                                                                            17       Final Checking
                                                                                                                                                                                                            17       Test for Elastic Travel &
                                                                                                                                                                                                            18       Release Value Within
                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Specified Range
                                                                                                                                                                                                            19       Troubleshooting
          BINdINg                                                         rental & demo > InsPectIon > 

          Maintenance Records

          SKI/BINdINg Maintenance Record

          Invenory #:                                 Ski Serial #:                                             Binding Model:
                                                                                  Correction Factors                 Left Ski                Right Ski


                                        Repairs/Service                          Left                Right         Twist                   Twist


          date of Service/inspection


                                                                           Toe          Heel   Toe       Heel

                                                                                                                            Legend: Clockwise       Counter-clockwise

          BOOT Maintenance Record

          Invenory #:                                     Boot Model:                                                              Sole Length:
                                                                                                                    Clean Test             Lubricated Test

                  date of              norm Compatible     All Adjustments/Parts           Repairs/Service         Twist                   Twist



             Service/inspection        interchangeable           Functionsl                  Performed

                                                                                                                            Legend: Clockwise       Counter-clockwise
BINdINg                                            rental & demo > record keePIng > 

 Rental Skier Instrucion & Warning
It is the Dealer’s responsibility to adequately assist each rental customer in equipment selection and to prop-
erly fit rental boots. Instructions regarding proper use of equipment must also be given at the time rental
equipment is provided.
When the Certified Technician           1. Show how to step into the bind-        ity. Included in this Liability        6. The skier* must then sign and
signs or initials the Rental Form,         ing.                                   Release Agreement is the                  date the Rental Form.
the technician is attesting that all    2. Show how to step out of the            specific warning that bindings         7. The skier must be given a copy
functional and instructional pro-          binding.                               will not release under all cir-           of the rental form that includes
cedures have been completed. To         3. Point out the visual indicator         cumstances where release may              a signed copy of the Liability
reduce your shop’s liability risk and      settings on the binding’s toe          prevent injury or death, nor is it        Release Agreement.
to receive indemnification from            and heel pieces. The skier must        possible to predict every situa-
Salomon, you must take the fol-            verify that these settings agree       tion in which they will release,
lowing steps when the skier re-            with the settings recorded on          and are, therefore, no guarantee
ceives their equipment. (The indi-         the Rental Form.                       of safety.
vidual picking up the equipment         4. Ask the skier to read the           5. The skier must understand that
must be the intended user, or in           Liability Release Agreement.           there are inherent and other
the case of a minor, the user’s par-       Point out that the skier is sign-      risks in the sport of skiing.
ent or guardian.)                          ing a release that limits liabil-

 Rental Record Keeping
Proper rental record keeping is key to your shop’s risk management program. Without a properly filled out
form, including a signed Liability Release Agreement, indemnification from Salomon will not apply.
A Rental Form must be filled out        The following is a list of informa-        including a mechanical inspec-        12. *Skier’s signature (in the case
for each rental transaction (ex-        tion that should be recorded for           tion, must be performed and               of a minor skier, the signa-
change of equipment is considered       every rental transaction. It is not        documented on a Workshop                  ture on the form must be that
to be a transaction). A Liability       necessary to use a Salomon Rental          Form.)                                    of the skier’s parent or legal
Release Agreement the same as           Form, but any form that the shop       8. *Visual Indicator Settings.                guardian) and date attesting
or the equivalent to the Salomon        uses must include the informa-         9. *Salomon Certified                         that the skier:
Liability Release Agreement must        tion* listed below. Without this           Technician’s signature or ini-            a. Has been instructed in the
be included on the Rental Form.         information*, indemnification will         tials attesting that all required            proper use of the equip-
The skier must read, understand,        not apply.                                 procedures have been com-                    ment.
sign and date this release. A copy      1. *Rental dates.                          pleted.                                   b. Has verified that the visual
of the properly filled out Rental       2. *Name and home address of           10. Rental fee.                                  indicator settings corre-
Form must be kept on file for five           the skier.                        11. *Liability Release Agreement                 spond to the recorded visual
years or the statute of limitations     3. Skier’s home phone number.              that is either the same as, or               indicator settings.
of the state or province, whichever     4.    Skier’s identification.              the substantial equivalent of,            c. Has read and understands
is longer. Multiple skier forms that    5. *Skier’s height, weight, age,           the Salomon release. Consult                 the Rental and Liability
allow each skier to read and sign            and skier type.                       your shop’s legal advisor to                 Release Agreement on the
the same form may be used if the        6. *Boots' inventory number. (If           be sure the language and type                rental form, releasing the
form meets the requirements out-             the skier is using their own          size of this agreement con-                  shop from liability.
lined in this section. It is recom-          boots, the boot brand, model          forms to state or provincial
mended that the form be reviewed             and sole length must be in-           law. If a form other than the
by Salomon’s Legal department                dicated on the Rental Form            Salomon form is used, the
prior to use. The person who signs           and the boot must pass visual         language shall accomplish
the rental form must be the skier            examination.)                         the same purpose and have
who is going to use the rental          7. *Skis' inventory number. (If            the same legal effect as the
equipment. In the case of a minor            the skier is using their own          language contained in the
                                                                                                                                                               S T EP 7

skier, the signature on the form             skis, the system would fall           Salomon agreement.
must be that of the skier’s parent           under Retail guidelines and a
or legal guardian.                           complete system inspection,                                                  REFERENCE
                                                                                                                          Page #   Section Name

                                                                                                                          30       Salomon Rental Form
                                                                                                                          17       Final Checking & System
                                                                                NOTE                                      30       Equipment Rental
                                                                                * On the 2006/2007 Salomon Rental                  & Liability Release
                                                                                  Form, the skier (or in the case of               Agreement
                                                                                  a minor, the skier’s parent or legal    31       Post Accident Ski
                                                                                  guardian) must sign and date the                 Equipment Inspection
                                                                                  Liability Release Agreement.                     Report
           BINdINg                                          rental & demo > record keePIng > 0

           Salomon Rental Form*
S TE P 7

           NOTE                                   REFERENCE                             PARTS
                                                                                        Reference #   Item Name
                                                  Page #   Section Name
           * U.S. form shown. The Canadian
             equivalent to this form has bilin-   29       Rental Skier Instruction &   B10069        (U.S.) Salomon Rental Form
             gual content.                                 Warning                      B10019        (CAN) Salomon Rental Form
BINdINg                                                    rental & demo > record keePIng > 1

 Post Accident Ski Equipment Inspection Report Form
A Post Accident Ski Equipment Inspection Report Form the same as or equivalent to the form provided must be
filled out if a person returns the equipment, whether the equipment is theirs or belongs to someone else, and
claims that they or someone else were injured. The report must be completed with “as is” mechanical inspection
measured release values. An insufficient or improperly completed form may cause denial of indemnification.
 Inspection Report Instructions
general Information
• All information should be printed     Post Accident Ski Equipment                                                                                                                        Workshop/Rental Form No.

  clearly.                              Inspection Report
• Any mistakes should be corrected
  and initialed.                         Skier Information
• If information is unknown, mark        nAME                                                                                                                                               vACCIdENT dATE

  UNK in the appropriate area.           HEIgHT                         vWEIgHT                           vAgE                              vSEX (circle one)                               vSKIER TyPE (circle one)

• If information does not apply, mark                                                                                                          M      F                                        1    2   3    -1     3+

  N/A in the appropriate area.           INJURy

Skier Information Section                RIgHT OR LEFT (circle one)     vSKI AREA

• Skier information should be taken      R      L

  from the rental or workshop form.
• Accident/injury information should     Equipment Information
                                                                                                                                            vMOdEL                                                          vLENgTH
  be taken from the ski patrol acci-     SKI MAKE

  dent report (if available).            SERIAL No.                                                                                         vRENTAL I.d. No. (if applicable)

Equipment Information Section                                                                                                               vMOdEL                                                          vSIZE
                                         BOOT MAKE
• Information should be taken from
  the visual inspection of equipment.    BOOT SOLE LENgTH in mm                                                                             vRENTAL I.d. No. (if applicable)

Equipment Inspection/Tests               BINdINg MAKE                                                                                       vMOdEL

• Refer to the most current Shop         TOE VISUAL INdICATOR (dIN) SCALE                                                                   vHEEL VISUAL INdICATOR (dIN) SCALE

  Practices Manual for Standard
                                                      to                                                                                                    to

                                         RENTAL FORWARd PRESSURE (SyNCHRO) SETTINg(S):
  Boot Sole information.
• Equipment inspections should be
  conducted on the equipment “as         Equipment Inspection/Tests
                                         Right Ski/Binding/Boot                                                                             Left Ski/Binding/Boot
• Inspection of binding adjust-
                                         N/A        yES    NO        (check one)                                                            N/A       yES        NO        (check one)
  ments should be in accordance
  with recommendations set forth in                                  Boot sole within Industry Norm Standards                                                              Boot sole within Industry Norm Standards
  the most current Shop Practices                                    All boot parts present, working correctly                                                             All boot parts present, working correctly
  Manual.                                                            AFD OK and intact                                                                                     AFD OK and intact
• System visual inspections should                                   Forward Pressure correct                                                                              Forward Pressure correct
  be in accordance with recommen-                                    Toe Height correct                                                                                    Toe Height correct
  dations set forth in the most cur-                                 Toe Wings set correctly                                                                               Toe Wings set correctly
  rent Shop Practices Manual.
                                                                     Brake fully functional                                                                                Brake fully functional
• Mechanical inspection tests should
                                                                     Ski damaged (bent etc.)                                                                               Ski damaged (bent etc.)
  be conducted at room temperature.
• The mechanical testing device                                      System passes visual inspections                                                                      System passes visual inspections

  should be properly calibrated and                                  Rental heel forward pressure setting correct                                                          Rental heel forward pressure setting correct
  operated in the manner recom-          VISUAL INdICATOR SETTINgS                                                                          VISUAL INdICATOR SETTINgS

  mended by the device manufac-          Toe:                               Heel:                                                            Toe:                                Heel:
                                                                                                                                                                                                                           S T EP 7

  turer.                                 CLOCKWISE TWIST MEASUREd RELEASE VALUES*                                                           CLOCKWISE TWIST MEASUREd RELEASE VALUES*

                                               I                II                III                                                             I                   II             III
• Mechanical tests should be con-
                                         COUNTERCLOCKWISE TWIST MEASUREd RELEASE VALUES*                                                    COUNTERCLOCKWISE TWIST MEASUREd RELEASE VALUES*
  ducted on the equipment “as is”.
                                               I                II              III                                                               I                   II             III
• Test results should be recorded in     FORWARd LEAN MEASUREd RELEASE VALUES*                                                              FORWARd LEAN MEASUREd RELEASE VALUES*
  Newton meters.                               I                II              III                                                               I                   II             III

Facility/Personnel/Testing device        * Record the number of results recommended by the manufacturer of the testing device. If not certain, record 3 values for each test.

• The “Inspection Technician” should
                                         Facility/Personnel/Testing device
                                         SHOP NAME                                                                                          vINSPECTION TECHNICIAN                                                vdATE
  be a current Salomon
  Certified Technician.                  REPORT REVIEWEd By                                                    vdATE                        vTESTINg dEVICE BRANd                                                 v­

• The report should be reviewed by
  the shop manager.
BINdINg                    maIntenance & rePaIr > 

All Salomon bindings have replaceable AFDs.
Specific AFD item numbers can be found
in the Salomon Spare Parts catalog and
ordered by contacting your customer
service representative.
BINdINg                                maIntenance & rePaIr > guIdelInes > 

Any incorrect use of a Salomon part or accessory or installation of a non-compatible brand accessory with a
Salomon system will automatically void both the warranty and indemnification for that system.
 Retail & Rental guidelines
 Retail guidelines
Salomon bindings require a mini-         replace damaged or excessively          pressure liquid cleaning systems      • Recommend to the skier that
mum of maintenance to enhance            worn parts and/or components.           to clean bindings.                      routine maintenance and in-
performance and their useful life.     • Clean the exposed areas of the        • Apply Salomon Grease (Ref.              spections be performed by a
They should be cleaned, inspected        components with a cloth or rag.         #000905) or the equivalent to           Salomon Authorized Dealer. This
and lubricated prior to each season      Wipe any dirt or grit from the          the lubrication points indicated        will help ensure that any prob-
and every 30 skier days per season       binding housings, heel track            for the appropriate model. Do           lem that may develop with the
as follows:                              and the region under the heel           not use silicone or penetrating         system can be detected and cor-
• Inspect all components for dam-        cup. Do not use solvents or high        oils unless the lubricant is spe-       rected by a trained technician.
  age or excessive wear. Repair or                                               cifically approved.

 Rental guidelines
Proper maintenance of rental sys-      • Clean the exposed areas of the        • Replace the heel on the track.        Rental Post Season Storage
tems includes a complete inspec-         components with a cloth or rag.       • This should be followed by peri-      To prepare rental equipment for
tion of the entire rental inventory      Wipe any dirt or grit from the          odic in-season inspections and        summer storage:
prior to the ski season. Bindings        binding housings, heel track            when a binding looks particu-         • All binding visual indicator ad-
should be cleaned, inspected and         and the region under the heel           larly dirty or if visual inspection     justments should be reduced
lubricated in the following manner:      cup. Do not use solvents or high        reveals that something may be           to the lowest setting. Do not
• Inspect all components of each         pressure liquid cleaning systems        wrong. This helps to ensure that        attempt to adjust the release set-
   set for damage or excessive           to clean bindings.                      all components are functioning          ting below the lowest setting as
   wear. Repair or replace damaged     • Apply Salomon Grease (Ref.              correctly.                              damage may result.
   or excessively worn parts and/or      #000905) or the equivalent to         Never attempt to interchange any        • The binding heels should be
   components.                           the lubrication points indicated      SR, SC or retail toe baseplates or        stored in the closed position.
• Remove the heel by sliding the         for each model. Do not use sili-      heel tracks with other model base-      • The equipment should be stored
   housing off the rear of the heel-     cone or penetrating oils unless       plates or heel tracks.                    in a cool, dry and ventilated area
   track*.                               the lubricant is specifically ap-                                               away from direct sunlight.

 Screw Extractor/Repair Kit
                                       Stripped Screw Holes                    drill slowly around the broken          Follow instructions for the installa-
A                                      Follow instructions for the installa-   piece using an up-and-down move-        tion of repair plugs (below).
                                       tion of repair plugs (below).           ment to let the shavings escape.        Re-mount the binding.
                                       Broken Screw or Broken Tap              Use caution not to hit the broken
                                                                                                                       Clean the extractor bit after each
                                       Removal                                 piece.
                                       When a screw or tap breaks in a         Continue to drill until the chuck
                                                                                                                       Installation of repair plugs
                                       ski, it must be removed to avoid        touches the bushings of the jig.
                                                                                                                       The existing hole may need to be
                                       further damage. It can be removed       This is the correct drilling depth
Salomon offers a Screw Extractor/                                                                                      widened using an 8 mm diameter
                                       as follows:                             of 10 mm.
Repair Kit (Ref. #000878) to re-                                                                                       bit, however do not drill more than
                                       Fit the extractor drill bit into the    Remove the broken piece inside          10 mm deep.
move/ replace broken binding
                                       electric drill with the shoulder        the extractor bit with a pair of
mounting screws. The kit comes                                                                                         Place a drop of glue onto the top
                                       touching the chuck.                     pliers.
with two different length bits and                                                                                     of the hole.
a quantity of repair plugs. Fig. A     Position the appropriate jig onto       Turn the ski over and hit the base
                                                                                                                       Tap a repair plug into the hole with
Repair plugs may be ordered            the ski with the jig bushing directly   lightly to remove all shavings.
                                                                                                                       a hammer until it is flush with the
separately.                            over the broken screw or tap.
                                                                                                                       topskin of the ski.

 Cants > Acceptable Use
Salomon bindings should not be altered in any way except as explicitly outlined in this manual.                         NOTE
The use of cants with Salomon bindings is acceptable, provided:                                                         * To remove heel pieces on tracks
                                                                                                                          with heel locks, loosen the rear
• The cants are of a high grade        • The cants do not impede the                                                      mounting screws at least three
  material designed for this use.        binding’s function as it was de-       PARTS                                     turns. Pull the heel piece backward
• The cants are installed in a pro-      signed, including proper function      Reference #   Item Name                   while lifting it up over the heel
                                                                                                                          lock. To replace the heel pieces,
  fessional manner.                      of the brake.                          000905 Salomon Grease
                                                                                                                          follow the removal procedure in re-
• Proper screw penetration into                                                 000878 Screw Extractor/Repair Kit         verse and tighten the rear mount-
  the ski meets current norms.                                                  000846 Repair Plugs                       ing screws securely.
BINdINg                                            maIntenance > afd rePlacement > 

MAINTENANCE & REPAIR > (continued)
 AFd/SCP Replacement
 Quadrax Models – without Absorbers                                            Quadrax Models – with Equalizer
                                                                              1.  Dismount the toe piece from the ski.
 J                                       K                                    2.  Remove the two rear mounting screws from the toe piece.
                                                                              3.  Remove the Equalizer (plate/spring/AFD) from the toe piece.
                                                                              4.  Pry the two AFD retention tabs on the underside of the Equalizer plate
                                                                                  up slightly with a screwdriver and lift the AFD/T-plate and spring off the
                                                                                  Equalizer plate.
                                                                              5. Slide the damaged AFD off the T-plate.
                                                                              6. Insert the tabs of the replacement AFD into the retention slots of the T-plate
                                                                                  and slide tabs to the locked position.
                                                                              7. Position the spring in the spring retention slot of the Equalizer plate.
 L                                       :                                    8. Compress the spring with the AFD/T-plate assembly while positioning the
                                                                                  assembly in place on the Equalizer plate and push it into its seated position.
                                                                              9. Attach the toe piece to the Equalizer.
                                                                              10. Remount the toe piece to the ski.

                                                                               Quadrax Models – with Absorbers
                                                                              1.   Dismount the toe piece from the ski.
                                                                              2.   Remove the Absorber from the toe piece.
1. Insert a screwdriver blade into      3. Remove the damaged AFD.            3.   Follow steps 1-3 of Quadrax Models – without Absorbers.
   the AFD removal slot located         4. Place the new AFD on the bind-     4.   Attach the Absorber to the toe piece.
   behind the Teflon pad. Fig. J           ing, seating the two AFD seat-     5.   Remount the toe piece to the ski.
   (There is no need to dismount           ing tabs into the binding AFD
   the toe piece from the ski.)            tab seats. Fig. L
2. Push the screwdriver handle          5. Gently push downward and for-
   forward and carefully pry back          ward on the AFD until it snaps
   on the handle while pushing             into place. Fig. :
   downward. Fig. K

 Other Models
1.   Dismount the toe piece from the interface or from the ski.
2.   Remove the AFD from the toe piece baseplate.
3.   Position the replacement AFD on the baseplate and press it into place.
4.   Remount the toe piece.

 Salomon Control Pedal Replacement
All Salomon bindings have replace-      For Toes mounted on Interfaces        For Toes mounted on Smartrak
able SCPs. The specific SCP item        and Skis (Smartrak grip/grip Plus,    Prolink/Control/Response
numbers can be found in the Salomon     SC, and ITF)                          1. Put the Toe Piece out the
Spare Parts catalog, though some        1. Dismount the Toe piece from           Interface.
SCP Reference Numbers are listed in        the Ski or The Interface by        2. Dismount the Toe piece from
the chart below..                          completely loosening the              the Set by completely loosening
Replacement procedures for SCPs            mounting screws.                      the mounting screws.
are as follows.                         2. Dismount manually the SCP on       3. Dismount manually the
                                           the Toe piece.                        SCP+Stirrup on the toe piece.
SCP Reference Numbers                   3. Take the new SCP and mount it      4. Take the new Set SCP+Stirrup
SCP Ref. N° Binding / System               manually under the Toe piece.         and mount it manually under
78830001    914 FIS 20 / 914            4. Tighten the Toe piece on the ski      the Toe piece.
            Z12 Ti, Z12, Z12 Ti SC,        or the Interface (4Nm torque).     5. Tighten the Toe piece on the
            Z10 Ti Axe+, Z10 TI,                                                 Stirrup (4Nm torque).
78830101    Z10 FIS 20, Z10 Ti SC,                                            6. Remount the Toe piece on the
            Z10, 710 Ti, 710 SC,
            710, 710 ITF.                                                        Interface.
78829401    Smartrak Prolink +914
            Smartrak Prolink &
78829501    Smartrak Control+ Z12,                                                                                        For instructions on replacing the AFD
            Z10, 711                                                                                                      on Spheric Performance and S710 Ti
            Smartrak Prolink &                                                                                            Spheric models, please refer to the
78829601    Smartrak Control+ Z12                                                                                         2005-2006 Salomon Shop Practices
            Ti, Z10 Ti, 710 Ti                                                                                            Manual
BINdINg          certIfIcatIon > 

The technician
who signs
the Authorized
or rental
form for any
must be
alpine binding
BINdINg                                                                              certIfIcatIon > exam > 

 2006/2007 Technician Certification Exam Questions
do not write on this form. Indicate answers on the Registration Form.
A score of 90, or 20 correct answers, must be obtained to pass. In addition, questions 3 to 7, 9, 11, and
13 to 17 are considered core questions and must be answered correctly.
1.   Salomon Technician Certification:                                              9.   If the forward pressure indicators on the heel are not aligning prop-
     a) Never has to be renewed.                                                         erly you should:
     b) Is valid whether or not the employer is a Salomon Authorized Alpine              a) Ignore it if they are close.
        Binding Dealer.                                                                  b) Make sure (adjustable) toe wings and toe height are correct.
     c) Does not require that Certified Technicians be familiar with Salomon             c) Remove the boot and move the heel forward or back to correct.
        Bindings through hands-on experience.                                            d) Answers B & C.
     d) Is valid for 2 years from the exam date and may be transferred
        between Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Dealers.                          10. When adjusting the toe height on Salomon Quadrax (Leisure) bind-
                                                                                        ings, you should:
2.   Indemnified Bindings are:                                                          a) Use a Salomon rental adjustment tool for the toe height screw.
     a) The 2006/2007 models only.                                                      b) Check your adjustment with a Salomon toe height card.
     b) Any Salomon binding still in use.                                               c) Answers A & B.
     c) Those that appear on the 2006/2007 Schedule of Indemnified                      d) None of the above; toe height adjustment is automatic.
        Bindings in the Salomon Shop Practices Manual.
     d) Not something a technician needs to know about.                              11. When testing the toe for elastic travel and return, the boot should:
                                                                                        a) Move slightly off center then release completely.
3.   A boot is considered incompatible with a Salomon binding if:                       b) Move off center at least 5 mm and return to within 2 mm of its
     a) It does not pass visual inspection.                                                original position.
     b) There is more than a I mm difference in sole flatness across its                c) Elastic travel only occurs while skiing and cannot be tested in the
        width.                                                                             shop.
     c) It does not conform to Standard Boot Sole Dimensions.                           d) None of the above.
     d) All of the above.
                                                                                    12. What is Skier Type?
4.   Examples of Salomon bindings that may be used with both junior &                   a) The degree of skill a skier possesses.
     adult boot sole norms are:                                                         b) A person who enjoys skiing.
     a) C607 & C608                                                                     c) A classification system based on “cautious,” “moderate,” or
     b) S910 T & S912 S                                                                    “aggressive” skiing preferences.
     c) C305 & C305 SR                                                                  d) Unnecessary information.
     d) You can’t use an adult norm sole with a Salomon junior binding.
                                                                                    13. A two year old is being fitted for his first pair of skis. He weighs
5.   If the mid-sole indicator on a Salomon jig and the mid-sole indicator
                                                                                        35 lb. What Skier Code would you use to help determine the visual
     on a boot do not agree, you should:
                                                                                        indicator setting of his bindings?
     a) Use the mid-sole mark on the jig to position it on the ski.
                                                                                        a) B               b) 3/4
     b) Not install the binding.
                                                                                        c) A               d) -1
     c) Leave the boot in the jig and use the mid-sole mark on the boot to
         position the jig on the ski.
                                                                                    14. A skier weighs 145 lb and measures 5’4” tall. She is a Type 1 skier
     d) Position the jig by splitting the difference between the two marks.
                                                                                        who is 52 years old. What is her Skier Code on the Chart?
                                                                                        a) J           b) I
6.   If there are no manufacturer's recommendations for drill bit selec-
                                                                                        c) H           d) K
     tion you should:
     a) Drill the ski with the bit in your drill, you can’t go wrong.
                                                                                    15. What should the initial visual indicator setting be for a 220-lb, 6’5’’,
     b) Drill one hole with a 3.6 mm bit and check for metal before switching
                                                                                        Type 3+ skier who is 25 years old and uses boots with a sole length
         to a 4.1 mm bit.
                                                                                        of 310 mm?
     c) Always use a 4.1 mm bit, all mounting platforms contain metal.
                                                                                        a) Not possible to determine.
     d) Use a 3.6 mm bit, you can always increase the torque on the screw-
                                                                                        b) 12
                                                                                        c) Ask the customer.
                                                                                        d) 11
7.   When mounting bindings, Salomon's recommendation for tapping is:
     a) Always tap.
                                                                                    16. Skiers requesting personal settings higher or lower than are indicat-
     b) Never tap. It’s too easy to damage the ski or break the tap.
                                                                                        ed by the 2006/2007 Salomon Adjustment Chart should:
     c) Always tap unless the manufacturer cautions against it.
                                                                                        a) Be asked if they wish to identify themselves as Type 3+ or Type -1
     d) If you countersink the holes with the drill bit, there is no need to tap.
                                                                                           and use the indicated settings.
                                                                                        b) Be instructed to adjust their bindings themselves.
8.   Salomon binding glue:
                                                                                        c) Be given the settings they want provided they sign a Requested
     a) Lubricates the screws.
                                                                                           Setting Release Agreement.
     b) Compensates for stripped holes.
                                                                                        d) Answer A or C.
     c) Creates a watertight seal.
     d) Answers A & C.
BINdINg                                                                       certIfIcatIon > exam > 

 2006/2007 Technician Certification Exam Questions (continued)

17. you are testing a used boot-binding system on a mechanical testing       21. When a skier picks up their equipment from your shop make sure:
    device. The Salomon binding has a visual indicator setting of 8 and          a) They speak with the technician who did the installation/adjustment.
    the boot sole is 308 mm long. What is the In-use Range for twist?            b) You only hand it over to the intended user.
    a) 67 Newton meters                                                          c) Someone explains the use of the equipment to them and provides
    b) 58 to 78 Nm                                                                  them with signed copies of the Workshop/Rental Form and Liability
    c) 50 to 91 Nm                                                                  Release Agreement.
    d) 67 to 91 Nm                                                               d) You wish them luck.

18. A mechanical testing device:                                             22. A Post Accident Ski Equipment Inspection Report form:
    a) Never needs re-calibration.                                               a) Is a critical tool in defending liability claims.
    b) Gives consistent results even when it is operated incorrectly.            b) Is only necessary in the case of lower body injuries.
    c) Requires properly trained technicians for consistent results.             c) Must be completed each time an accident is reported.
    d) Is only used in rental shops.                                             d) Answers A and C.

19. Mechanical inspections of rental equipment:
    a) Are required pre-season .
    b) Are required periodically in-season.
    c) Ensure that all components are functioning properly.
    d) All of the above.

20. Workshop or Rental Forms must:
    a) Be used for every transaction.
    b) Be kept on file for 5 years or for the statute of limitations.
    c) Be signed by the customer and the Certified Technician.
    d) All of the above.

 On-line Registration Instructions
Applying technicians must complete the 2006/2007 Salomon on-line certification registration and test.
A score of at least 90 (20 correct answers) must be achieved to pass the exam. Applying technicians are
not certified until a passing score is achieved.

• U.S. dealers will find the on-line certification registration and test at: http://www.salomoncertification.com
• For the U.S., a $12 fee will be invoiced for each Registration and Exam submitted on line at www.salomoncertification.com
• The U.S. fee is $18 for each Registration/Exam submitted by mail or fax to Salomon, or for technicians certified by any approved industry training
  Fax: (971) 234-7002
  Salomon Certification/Customer Service
  5055 North Greeley Ave.
  Portland, OR 97217

• Canadian dealers will find the on-line certification registration and test at: http://www.salomonhookup.ca
BINdINg   adjustment chart > 

2006/2007 Technician Certification Answer Form

This form is for U.S. dealers only.
Get all your certification needs
at www.salomoncertification.com

On line certification test:    $12                         Faxed or mailed test:               $18

Technician & Store Information

EXAM DATE                                                  TECHNICIAN’S NAME (PRINT CLEARLY)

STORE ACCOUNT #                                            STORE NAME

SHOP PHONE #                                               STORE ADDRESS

Please print clearly your information above and fax or mail your Certification Answers to (971) 234-7002.
A score of 90, or 20 correct answers, must be obtained to pass.
In addition, questions 3 to 7, 9, 11, and 13 to 17 are considered core questions and must be answered correctly.
Please circle your answer for each question.
All answers must be clearly marked. Any partially circled answers could be marked incorrect.

Answer Section

     a      b      c       d         a    b     c      d        a       b    c     d                 a    b     c   d

     a      b      c       d         a    b     c      d        a       b    c     d                 a    b     c   d

     a      b      c       d         a    b     c      d        a       b    c     d                 a    b     c   d

     a      b      c       d         a    b     c      d        a       b    c     d                 a    b     c   d

     a      b      c       d         a    b     c      d        a       b    c     d

     a      b      c       d         a    b     c      d        a       b    c     d

 Salomon Certification
 5055 North Greeley Ave.
 Portland, OR 97217
 Fax: (971) 234-7002
 Phone: 1 (800) 654-2668       TECHNICIANS SIGNITURE                                           SIGNITURE DATE
SKI/SNOWBLAdE                                                                                                                          0

                              MONOCOQUE SINgLE WALL
                              Salomon’s unique one piece composite shell offers the
                              most powerful edgegrip and efficient transmission of
                              power to the edge.

                                                                                       PULSE PAd
                                                                                       A visco-elastic layer placed over the edge,
                                                                                       Pulse Pad Technology eliminates vibration, and
                                                                                       maximizes ski to snow contact on hard snow.

                                                                                      gRAPHITE BASE
                                                                                      Race proven performance.
          WOOd CORE                                                                   X Wing’s graphite base offers the fastest glide in
                                                                                      the widest variety of snow conditions.
          Vertically laminated wood core offers stability
          at speed, and powerful rebound.
SKI/SNOWBLAdE                                                                             technIcal features > 1

 Adult Ski Length Selection

 For the Salomon skis, find the corresponding centimetre length for your weight.
Add to that number any additional length from the boxes below according to your ability, aggressiveness, the snow conditions you ski most
of the time and the kind of skis you want to choose.

 Kg                       < 47                48 - 52              53 - 58               59 - 65               66 - 73               74 - 82               83 >

 SKI LENgTH cm      140 cm 145 cm 150 cm 155 cm 160 cm 165 cm 170 cm

                    1. BEgINNER                   2. INTERMEdIATE                3. AdVANCEd                     4. EXPERT                      5. SPECIALIST

                    You are skiing                Able to ski                    Able to ski                     Able to ski                    Able to ski on all
                    the first week                most runs                      all runs                        on all runs                    runs in changing

        +           (rental skis)

                      - 20 cm
                                                  in good conditions

                                                        - 5 cm
                                                                                 in good conditions

                                                                                     + 0 cm
                                                                                                                 in any conditions

                                                                                                                     + 5 cm

                                                                                                                                                  + 10 cm
                    discover first                Prefer moderate                Prefer a variety                Prefer high                    Prefer highest
                    ski sensations                speeds                         of speeds                       speeds                         speeds


                    Most of the time on groomed piste or on hard snow                              Most of the time off piste or on soft snow

        +           conditions

                                              + 0 cm

                                                                                                                            + 5 cm
                                                                                     KINd OF SKI

                    SKI                                                                            SKI

                    EQUIPE 3V RACE                                                                 EQUIPE 2V RACE
                                                                                                   EQUIPE gC / gC RACE / gC SERIES
                    EQUIPE 3V WORLd CHAMPION
                                                                                                   dEMO X 2V /XR
                    EQUIPE SC RACE

                    dEMO X 3V / XT / X LAdy
                                                                                                   X WINg
                    STREETRACER                                                                    TENEIgHTy gUN / SPK / FOIL / THRUSTER
                    RUSH                                                                           SCARLET / MyNX / TEMPTRESS
                    TENEIgHTy FLyER                                                                AK ROCKET

                                               - 1 cm                                                                       + 4 cm

                    This total centimetre length is a guide,
                    your preferred length will be the ski closest to the recommended total.
SKI/SNOWBLAdE                                                                                       technIcal features > 

Junior Ski Length Selection

Ski length (and binding) according to weight and height of children*
                                      Child Height   85 to 95 cm    95 to 105 cm 105 to 115 cm 115 to 125 cm 125 to 135 cm 135 to 145 cm 145 to 155 cm 155 to 165 cm 165 to 175 cm
                                      Child Weight    10 to 14 kg   14 to 18 kg   18 to 22 kg    22 to 26 kg   26 to 30 kg   30 to 37 kg   37 to 45 kg   45 to 55 kg   55 to 65 kg*

                       Approx.        Skiing
                       Age of Child   Aptitude
                                      Beginner         70 cm          80 cm
                                                       305 mini      305 mini
 X Wing grom XS        3 to 7                          80 cm
                                      intermediate    C305 mini
 786237                years old
                                      Beginner                                      90 cm         100 cm       110 cm
                                                                                   305 mini         305           305
 X Wing T S 786236     3 to 7                                         90 cm        100 cm         110 cm
 Equipe T S 786235     years old                                     305 mini         305           305
                                      Beginner                                                                               120 cm         130 cm
                                                                                                                                305           607
 X Wing T M 786234     6 to 10                                                                                 120 cm        130 cm
 Equipe T M 786231     years old                                                                                  305           607
                                      good                                                        120 cm       130 cm
                                                                                                    305           607
                                      Beginner                                                                                                            140 cm        150 cm
 X Wing T L 786233                                                                                                                                          608        Z 10 Fis 20
 Equipe T L 786228     8 to 15                                                                                                              140 cm        150 cm
 Equipe 8 T L          years old                                                                                                              608        Z 10 Fis 20
                                      good                                                                                   140 cm         150 cm
                                                                                                                                608        Z 10 Fis 20
                                      Beginner                                                                               120 cm         130 cm        130 cm        140 cm
 X Wing Fury T                                                                                                                  305           607           608        Z 10 Fis 20
 786225                6 to 15                                                                                 120 cm        130 cm         140 cm        150 cm
 Equipe 10 T           years old                                                                                  305           607           608        Z 10 Fis 20
                                      good                                                        120 cm       130 cm        140 cm         150 cm
                                                                                                    305           607           608        Z 10 Fis 20
                                      Beginner                                                    101 cm       111 cm
                                                                                                    305           305
 1080 Fish S 786859    5 to 7                                                      101 cm         111 cm
 Kitten S 786860       years old                                                      305           305
                                      Beginner                                                                               121 cm         131 cm        141 cm
                                                                                                                                305           607           608
 1080 Fish L 786218    6 to 12                                                                                 121 cm        131 cm         141 cm
 Kitten L 786790       years old                                                                                  305           607           608
                                      good                                                        121 cm       131 cm        141 cm
                                                                                                    305           607           608
 Example for X Wing Fury T: a 9-year-old child weighing 35 kg (and measuring 140 cm), skiing at a good level, must choose a 140 cm ski with a “608” binding.
 *If weight is over 65 kg (142 Ibs), SALOMON strongly recommend to use an ADULT ski.

Pilot Boot Sole Lengths
Boot size ranges (Mondopoint) for Pilot models and ski lengths
                        Ski               Boot Sizes (Mondopoint)                                                Ski               Boot Sizes (Mondopoint)
                      Length                                                                                   Length
Model                  (cm) 22.0 23.0 24.0 25.0 26.0 27.0 28.5 29.5 30.5 31.5 32.5          Model               (cm) 22.0 23.0 24.0 25.0 26.0 27.0 28.5 29.5 30.5 31.5 32.5
                        170                                                                                      175
                        165                                                                 P Scrambler 8        165
P Equipe SC
P demo 10 3V            160                                                                 P Scrambler 7        155
                        155                                                                                      145
                        150                                                                                      169
P Equipe gC             178                                                                 P Rush n°10
P Equipe 9 gC           170                                                                                      154
P Crossmax V12                                                                                                   146
P Crossmax V10                                                                                                   174
P demo 10 2V            154                                                                                      166
P demo 9                                                                                    P Siam n°10
                        146                                                                                      158
                        180                                                                                      149
                        175                                                                                      174
P Crossmax V8
                        165                                                                 P Siam n°7
                        155                                                                                      154
                        182                                                                                      144
P Scrambler Hot
P Scrambler 9           166
SKI/SNOWBLAdE                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             technIcal reference > 

                                                                                                      Measurements                                                                                                                    Construction                                                                                    Core                                                 Base                                                                                    Layout                                                                                                                              Specific Features
                                                                                     Side Cut                                                   Weight (g)                                                                                                 Composite isocell                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Women

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  UHMW (G) Graphite / (D) Designed
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     HMW (G) Graphite / (D) Designed
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Wood Core (PP) Pulse pad

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Forward Mounted Binding
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        WSS (W Specific Sidecut)
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           Monocoque double Wall

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Monocoque Single Wall

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         Complex (PP) Pulse pad
                                                                                                                               Mid sole boot

                                                                                                                                               Ski + System (1/2 pair)
                                                            Length (cm)

                                                                                                                Radius (m)

                                                                                                                                                                                                               Carbon reinforcement
                                                                                                                                                                         (naked) Ski (1/2 pair)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Monocoque Titanium
               Commercial designation
                                         Binding + Brake
               System                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Other

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           Lite Single Wall

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           diatex Metal

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Tip protector
                                                                                       Waist (mm)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Bar coding
                                                                                                    Tail (mm)
                                                                          Tip (mm)



                                                            175           106          67            90         21.5          750              2020
               Equipe 2V Race            914 + B75

                                                            180           106          67            90         22.6          773              2090                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  FIS Norms; Thickness: (48.6/49.5/49.9)




               Smartrak Prolink          Z12 + B75
                                                            185           106          67            90         24.2          794              2160

                                                            150           117          66           102         10.6          625              1790
               Equipe 3V Race            914 + B75          155           118          66           102         11.4          655              1830

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   FIS Norms; Thickness: (46.1/46.7/47.3/47.7)




               Smartrak Prolink          Z12 + B75          160           119          66           103         11.7          684              1870
                                                            165           120          66           103         12.5          714              1960
                                                            154           117          66            98         11.4          654              1900
               Equipe gC Race            914 + B75          162           117          67            99         12.9          697              2000




               Smartrak Prolink          Z12 + B75          170           117          68           100         14.8          740              2100
                                                            178           117          69           101         16.2          784              2225
                                                            154           117          66            98         11.4          654              1920
               Equipe gC Series          Z12 + B75          162           117          67            99         12.9          697              2020




               Smartrak Response         Z10 + B75          170           117          68           100         14.8          740              2120
                                                            178           117          69           101         16.2          784              2245
                                                            148           118          65            99         10.3          623              1990
               Streetracer 10                               156           120          65           100         11.3          666              2080
                                         Z10 + B75




               Smartrak Response                            164           122          65           101         12.2          716              2160
                                                            172           124          65           102         13.1          754              2230
                                                            148           118          65            99         10.3          623              1690
               Streetracer 8                                156           120          65           100         11.3          666              2055
                                         711 + B75





               Smartrak Control                             164           122          65           101         12.2          716              2135
                                                            172           124          65           102         13.1          754              2205
                                                            140           114          66           100          9.8          585              1430
                                                            148           116          66           101         10.7          621              1560
               Streetracer 6
                                         610 + B75          156           118          66           102         11.6          664              1690



               Smartrak Grip
                                                            164           120          66           103         12.6          708              1815
                                                            172           122          66           104         13.5          752              1940
               XW AK Rocket                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Asymetrical Graphics; Swallow Tail;
                                                            195           130          95           114         25.0          845                                        2300




               Naked                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      XXL Chassis (95 wide waist)
               XW Sandstorm
                                                            173           130 96 124                            18.6          781              2195                      1890                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Asymetrical Graphics;
               Smartrak Control          914 + B100




               or Naked
                                                            187           135 101 126                           22.2          852              2595                      2290                                                                                                                                                                                                     D                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 XXL Chassis (95 wide waist); Wider Edges
                                                            156           124 81 112                            13.0           711             1850                      1550
               XW Fury
                                         914 + B90          164           124 83 113                            15.2           754             2010                      1710                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Asymetrical Graphics;
               Smartrak Control





                                         Z12 Ti + B90       172           124 85 114                            17.6           797             2150                      1850                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              XL Chassis (85 wide waist)
               or Naked
                                                            180           124 87 115                            20.4           840             2315                      2015
                                                            146           124 72 104                            10.1           612             1660                      1330
               XW Tornado                                   154           124 73 105                            11.4           654             1760                      1430
                                         914 + B80
               Smartrak Prolink                             162           124 74 106                            12.9           697             1860                      1530                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Asymetrical Graphics;
                                         Z12 Ti* + B80




               or Naked*                                    170           124 75 107                            14.5           740             1960                      1630                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               L Chassis (75 wide waist)
                                         *except size 186
               *except size 186                             178           124 76 108                            16.2           784             2060                      1730
                                                            186           124 77 109                            18.3           829             2160
                                                            146           124 72 104                            10.1           612             1610
                                                            154           124 73 105                            11.4           654             1710
               XW Blast
                                         Z12 + B80          162           124 74 106                            12.9           697             1810                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         L Chassis (75 wide waist)




               Smartrak Response
                                                            170           124 75 107                            14.5           740             1910
                                                            178           124 76 108                            16.2           784             2010
                                                            156           124 81 112                            13.0           711             1725
               XW Hurricane                                 164           124 83 113                            15.2           754             1885
All Mountain


                                         Z12 + B90                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         XL Chassis (85 wide waist)



               Smartrak Control                             172           124 85 114                            17.6           797             2015
                                                            180           124 87 115                            20.4           840             2175
                                                            146           124 72 104                            10.1           612             1580                      1280
               X-Wing 10                                    154           124 73 105                            11.4           654             1680                      1380
               Smartrak Control          Z10 + B80          162           124 74 106                            12.9           697             1780                      1480                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               L Chassis (75 wide waist)





               or Naked                                     170           124 75 107                            14.5           740             1880                      1580
                                                            178           124 76 108                            16.2           784             1980                      1680
                                                            135           112 70 102                             9.6           570             1400                      1110
                                                            145           114 70 103                            10.8           615             1510                      1220
               X-Wing 8
                                                            155           116 70 104                            12.1           667             1705                      1400
               Smartrak Control          711 + B80                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          M Chassis (70 wide waist)





                                                            160           117 70 105                            12.6           696             1805                      1500
               or Naked
                                                            165           118 70 105                            13.3           719             1835                      1530
                                                            175           120 70 106                            14.7           772             2015                      1710
                                                            135           112 70 102                             9.6           570             1400
                                                            145           114 70 103                            10.8           615             1510
               X-Wing 6                                     155           116 70 104                            12.1           667             1690
                                         610 + B80                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          M Chassis (70 wide waist)





               Smartrak Grip                                160           117 70 105                            12.6           696             1790
                                                            165           118 70 105                            13.3           719             1820
                                                            175           120 70 106                            14.7           772             2000
                                                            135           112 70 102                             9.6           570             1400
                                                            145           114 70 103                            10.8           615             1510
               X-Wing 5                                     155           116 70 104                            12.1           667             1690
                                         610 + B80                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          M Chassis (70 wide waist)





               Smartrak Grip                                160           117 70 105                            12.6           696             1790
                                                            165           118 70 105                            13.3           719             1820
                                                            175           120 70 106                            14.7           772             2000
                                                            138           112 70 101                             9.5           585             1560
                                                            146           113 70 102                            10.6           625             1630
               X-Wing 4                                     154           114 70 102                            11.7           665             1700
                                         610 + B80                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          M Chassis (70 wide waist)





               Smartrak Grip                                162           115 70 103                            12.9           705             1800
All Mountain

                                                            170           116 70 103                            14.2           745             1870
                                                            178           117 70 104                            15.4           785             1940
                                                            138           112 70 101                             9.5           585                                       1270
                                                            146           113 70 102                            10.6           625                                       1340
               X-Wing 3* (Naked)                            154           114 70 102                            11.7           665                                       1410
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            M Chassis (70 wide waist)





               (*U.S. only)                                 162           115 70 103                            12.9           705                                       1510
                                                            170           116 70 103                            14.2           745                                       1580
                                                            178           117 70 104                            15.4           785                                       1650
                                                            168           110 77 102                            19.1           807                                       1540                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Asymetrical Graphics; Full Width Total Edge

               Teneighty SPK (Naked)




                                                            180           113 79 106                            21.2           865                                       1790                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Reinforcement; Twin Tip; Tip & Tail Rivvets
                                                            154           130 92 122                            12.8         689/669                                     1670
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Asymetrical Graphics; Full Width Total Edge
                                                            164           130 94 123                            15.5         750/730                                     1780

               Teneighty gun (Naked)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Reinforcement; Twin Tip; Dual Boot Center;




                                                            174           130 96 124                            18.6         802/782                                     1900
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Wider Edges
                                                            188           135 101 126                           22.2         875/855                                     2390
                                                            150           124 79 111                            11.1         677/695                                     1350
                                                            158           124 81 112                            13.0         720/740                                     1480
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Asymetrical Graphics; Full Width Total Edge


               Teneighty Foil (Naked)                       166           124 83 113                            15.2         763/783                                     1640




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Reinforcement; Twin Tip; Dual Boot Center
                                                            174           124 85 114                            17.6         806/826                                     1770
                                                            182           124 87 115                            20.4         849/869                                     1930
                                                            151           114 80 108                            12.7         675/695                                     1390
               Teneighty Thruster                           161           114 80 108                            14.8         719/739                                     1560                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Asymetrical Graphics; Twin Tip; Tip Rivets;





               (Naked)                                      171           114 80 108                            17.1         784/804                                     1680                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Dual Boot Center
                                                            181           114 80 108                            19.5         830/850                                     1840
                                                            141           110 76 102                            12.4         640/660                                     1150
                                                            151           110 78 103                            15.3         690/710                                     1290

               Teneighty Flyer (Naked)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Twin Tip; Tip Rivets; Dual Boot Center



                                                            161           110 80 104                            18.7         740/760                                     1390
                                                            171           110 81 105                             21          790/810                                     1700
SKI/SNOWBLAdE                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             technIcal reference > 

                                                                                                      Measurements                                                                                                                    Construction                                                                                    Core                                                 Base                                                                                    Layout                                                                                                                               Specific Features
                                                                                     Side Cut                                                   Weight (g)                                                                                                 Composite isocell                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Women

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  UHMW (G) Graphite / (D) Designed
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     HMW (G) Graphite / (D) Designed
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Wood Core (PP) Pulse pad

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Forward Mounted Binding
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        WSS (W Specific Sidecut)
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           Monocoque double Wall

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Monocoque Single Wall

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         Complex (PP) Pulse pad
                                                                                                                               Mid sole boot

                                                                                                                                               Ski + System (1/2 pair)
                                                            Length (cm)

                                                                                                                Radius (m)

                                                                                                                                                                                                               Carbon reinforcement
                                                                                                                                                                         (naked) Ski (1/2 pair)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Monocoque Titanium
               Commercial designation
                                          Binding + Brake
               System                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Other

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           Lite Single Wall

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           diatex Metal

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Tip protector
                                                                                       Waist (mm)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Bar coding
                                                                                                    Tail (mm)
                                                                          Tip (mm)



                                                            144           112          63           93          10.3           614             1310
               Rush N° 10                                   152           112          64           94          11.7           657             1450

                                          Z10 Ti + B75



               Smartrak Control                             160           112          65           95          13.3           701             1600
                                                            168           112          66           96          15.0           746             1680
                                                            144           112          63           93          10.3           614             1310
               Rush N° 8                                    152           112          64           94          11.7           657             1450

                                          710 Ti + B75



               Smartrak Grip Plus                           160           112          65           95          13.3           701             1600
                                                            168           112          66           96          15.0           746             1680
                                                            140           114          66           100          9.8           593             1430                      1140
                                                            148           116          66           101         10.7           629             1560                      1270
               Rush N° 6
                                          609 Ti + B75      156           118          66           102         11.6           676             1690                      1400




               Smartrak Grip or Naked
                                                            164           120          66           103         12.6           716             1815                      1525
                                                            172           122          66           104         13.5           760             1940                      1650
                                                            153           124          73           105         11.4           662             1655
               Siam Origin’s                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Translucent Base and Layout;
                                          Z10 Ti + B80      161           124          74           106         12.9           705             1755




               Smartrak Control                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             L Chassis (75 wide waist)
                                                            169           124          75           107         14.5           748             1855
                                                            145           124          72           104         10.1           620             1580
                                                            153           124          73           105         11.4           662             1680
               Siam N° 10
                                          Z10 Ti + B80      161           124          74           106         12.9           705             1780                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         L Chassis (75 wide waist)




               Smartrak Control
                                                            169           124          75           107         14.5           748             1880
                                                            177           124          76           108         16.2           792             1980
                                                            145           124          72           104         10.1           620             1580
               Siam N° 8                                    153           124          73           105         11.4           662             1680
                                          Z10 Ti + B80                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      L Chassis (75 wide waist)




               Smartrak Grip Plus                           161           124          74           106         12.9           705             1780
                                                            169           124          75           107         14.5           748             1880
All Mountain

                                                            134           112          70           102          9.6           578             1400                      1110
                                                            144           114          70           103         10.8           623             1510                      1220
               Siam N° 5                                    154           116          70           104         12.1           675             1630                      1340
                                          609 Ti + B80                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      M Chassis (70 wide waist)




               Smartrak Grip or Naked                       159           117          70           105         12.6           704             1695                      1405
                                                            164           118          70           105         13.3           727             1760                      1470
                                                            174           120          70           106         14.7           780             1910                      1620
                                                            137           112          70           101          9.5           593             1560                      1270
               Siam N° 4                                    145           113          70           102         10.6           633             1630                      1340
               Smartrak Grip              609 Ti + B80      153           114          70           102         11.7           673             1700                      1410                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               M Chassis (70 wide waist)



               or Naked                                     161           115          70           103         12.9           713             1800                      1510
                                                            169           116          70           103         14.2           753             1870                      1580
                                                            137           112          70           101          9.5           593                                       1270
                                                            145           113          70           102         10.6           633                                       1340
               Siam N° 3* (Naked)
                                                            153           114          70           102         11.7           673                                       1410                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               M Chassis (70 wide waist)




               (*U.S. only)
                                                            161           115          70           103         12.9           713                                       1510
                                                            169           116          70           103         14.2           753                                       1580
                                                            154           130          92           122         12.8         689/669                                     1670                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Asymetrical Graphics; Full Width Total Edge

               Scarlet (Naked)                              164           130          94           123         15.5         750/730                                     1780                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Reinforcement; Twin Tip; Dual Boot Center;




                                                            174           130          96           124         18.6         802/782                                     1900                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Wider Edges
                                                            150           124          79           111         11.2         677/697                                     1350

                                                            158           124          81           112         13.0         720/740                                     1480                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Asymetrical Graphics; Full Width Total Edge

               Mynx (Naked)




                                                            166           124          83           113         15.2         763/783                                     1640                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Reinforcement; Twin Tip; Dual Boot Center
                                                            174           124          85           114         17.6         806/826                                     1770
                                                            151           114          80           108         12.7         675/695                                     1390
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Asymetrical Graphics; Twin Tip; Tip Rivets;

               Temptress (Naked)                            161           114          80           108         14.8         719/739                                     1560




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Dual Boot Center
                                                            171           114          80           108         17.1         784/804                                     1680
               Equipe T 2V Race           914 + B75
                                                            175           110          65           89          19.7          758              1830                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Junior FIS Norm; Thickness: (48.9)



               Smartrak Grip              Z12 + B75
                                                            145           104          65           86          15.1          620              1480
               Equipe T 2V Race           Z12 + B75
                                                            155           106          65           87          16.6          666              1570                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Junior FIS Norm; Thickness: (45.7/46.6/47.9)



               Smartrak Grip              Z10 + B75
                                                            165           108          65           88          18.1          712              1740
               Equipe T 2V Race*                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Junior FIS Norm; Junior Norm Screw Length;
                                                            135           101          65           85          14.0          574                                        1050



               (Naked) (*U.S. only)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             Thickness: (29.0)
               Equipe T 3V Race
                                          914 + B75         155           117          63           100         11.2          673              1580                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Junior FIS Norm; Thickness: (50.0)




               Smartrak Grip
                                                            130           112          63            98          8.0          562              1395
               Equipe T 3V Race           Z12 + B75
                                                            140           114          63            99          9.2          609              1480                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Junior FIS Norm; Thickness: (48.5/49.1/49.7)




               Smartrak Grip              Z10 + B75
                                                            150           116          63           100         10.4          656              1595
               Equipe T 3V Race*                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Junior FIS Norm; Junior Norm Screw Length;
                                                            120           106          63           93          7.9           520                                        815




               (Naked) (*U.S. only)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             Thickness: (28.4)
               Equipe 8 T                                   140           100          64           89          13.3           586   1370



               Powerplate                                   150           102          65           87          13.6           615   1500
                                                            140           100          64           89          13.3           586                                       1010
               Equipe T L (Naked)



                                                            150           102          65           87          13.6           615                                       1130
                                                            120            99          65           85           9.3           495                                        790
               Equipe T M (Naked)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Junior Norm Screw Length



                                                            130            99          65           85          11.2           541                                        900

                                                             90            99          65           84           4.9           355                                        490
               Equipe T S (Naked)                           100            99          65           84           6.2           400                                        570                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Junior Norm Screw Length



                                                            110            99          65           84           7.7           445                                        680
                                                            140           100          64           89          13.3           586                                       1010
               X-Wing T L (Naked)



                                                            150           102          65           87          13.6           615                                       1130
                                                            120            99          65           85           9.3           495                                        790
               X-Wing T M (Naked)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Junior Norm Screw Length



                                                            130            99          65           85          11.2           541                                        900
                                                             90            99          65           84           4.9           355                                        490
               X-Wing T S (Naked)                           100            99          65           84           6.2           400                                        570                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Junior Norm Screw Length



                                                            110            99          65           84           7.7           445                                        680
                                                             70            99          65           84           2.5           280                                        330
               X-Wing grom XS (Naked)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Junior Norm Screw Length



                                                             80            99          65           84           3.6           310                                        410
                                                            121           105          70           97           8.4         555/575                                      830
               Teneighty Fish L (Naked)                     131           105          72           98          10.6         605/625                                      940                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Twin Tip



                                                            141           105          74           99          13.3         655/675                                     1050
                                                            101           105          66           95           4.9         455/475                                      590
               Teneighty Fish S (Naked)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Twin Tip



                                                            111           105          68           96           6.5         505/525                                      710
                                                            121           105          70           97           8.4         555/575                                      830
               Kitten L (Naked)                             131           105          72           98          10.6         605/625                                      940                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Twin Tip



                                                            141           105          74           99          13.3         655/675                                     1050
                                                            101           105          66           95           4.9         455/475                                      590
               Kitten S (Naked)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Twin Tip



                                                            111           105          68           96           6.5         505/525                                      710
SKI/SNOWBLAdE                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               technIcal reference > 

                                                                                          Measurements                                                                                                                  Construction                                                                                    Core                                                 Base                                                                                    Layout                                                                                                                             Specific Features
                                                                         Side Cut                                                 Weight (g)                                                                                                 Composite isocell                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Women

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    UHMW (G) Graphite / (D) Designed
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       HMW (G) Graphite / (D) Designed
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Wood Core (PP) Pulse pad

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Forward Mounted Binding
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          WSS (W Specific Sidecut)
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             Monocoque double Wall

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Monocoque Single Wall

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           Complex (PP) Pulse pad
                                                                                                                 Mid sole boot

                                                                                                                                 Ski + System (1/2 pair)
                                                Length (cm)

                                                                                                    Radius (m)

                                                                                                                                                                                                 Carbon reinforcement
                                                                                                                                                           (naked) Ski (1/2 pair)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Monocoque Titanium
    Commercial designation
                              Binding + Brake
    System                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Other

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             Lite Single Wall

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             diatex Metal

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Tip protector
                                                                           Waist (mm)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Bar coding
                                                                                        Tail (mm)
                                                              Tip (mm)



                                                154           117          66            98         11.4         654             1900
    Equipe gC Race                              162           117          67            99         12.9         697             2000
                              Z12 + B75                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Durable Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base




    Smartrak Prolink                            170           117          68           100         14.8         740             2100
                                                178           117          69           101         16.2         784             2225
                                                140           114          66           100          9.8         585                                       1140
                                                148           116          66           101         10.7         621                                       1270
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Size Color Coding; Wave Top Sheet;
    Streetracer 600 (Naked)                     156           118          66           102         11.6         664                                       1400




                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Reinforced Black Base; Wider Edges
                                                164           120          66           103         12.6         708                                       1525
                                                172           122          66           104         13.5         752                                       1650
                                                146           124          72           104         10.1         612             1610
                                                154           124          73           105         11.4         654             1710
    XW Blast
                              Z12 + B80         162           124          74           106         12.9         697             1810                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Durable Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base




    Smartrak Response
                                                170           124          75           107         14.5         740             1910
                                                178           124          76           108         16.2         784             2010
                                                146           124          72           104         10.1         612             1580
                                                154           124          73           105         11.4         654             1680
    X-Wing 10
                              Z10 + B80         162           124          74           106         12.9         697             1780                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Durable Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base





    Smartrak Control
                                                170           124          75           107         14.5         740             1880
                                                178           124          76           108         16.2         784             1980
                                                145           117          73           106         10.6         615                                       1180
                                                155           119          73           107         11.9         660                                       1290                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Size Color Coding; Wave Top Sheet;
    X-Wing 700





                                                165           121          73           108         13.2         705                                       1400                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Reinforced Black Base; Wider Edges
                                                175           123          73           109         14.5         750                                       1510
                                                135           112          70           102          9.6         570                                       1130
                                                145           114          70           103         10.8         615                                       1240
                                                155           116          70           104         12.1         667                                       1360                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Size Color Coding; Wave Top Sheet;
    X-Wing 400




                                                160           117          70           105         12.6         696                                       1425                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Reinforced Black Base; Wider Edges
                                                165           118          70           105         13.3         719                                       1490
                                                175           120          70           106         14.7         772                                       1640
                                                140           114          66           100          9.8         593                                       1140
                                                148           116          66           101         10.7         629                                       1270
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Size Color Coding; Wave Top Sheet;
    Rush 600 (Naked)                            156           118          66           102         11.6         676                                       1400



                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Reinforced Black Base; Wider Edges
                                                164           120          66           103         12.6         716                                       1525
                                                172           122          66           104         13.5         760                                       1650
                                                135           112          70           102          9.6         578                                       1100
                                                145           114          70           103         10.8         623                                       1220
                                                155           116          70           104         12.1         675                                       1340                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Size Color Coding; Durable Top Sheet;
    Siam 400 (Naked)




                                                160           117          70           105         12.6         704                                       1405                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Reinforced Black Base; Wider Edges
                                                165           118          70           105         13.3         727                                       1470
                                                175           120          70           106         14.7         780                                       1620

    Access 120 Unisex         609 + B80         120           112          76           102         8.9          541             1200                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           Translucent Base



    Snowblade 99              609 SC + B80       99           105          80           100         6.0              /                                     1390


SKI/SNOWBLAdE                                                                                                             snowblade > 

 Warning                                                                                Snowblade Maintenance & Repairs
Be careful: do not use Snowblade® skiboards if you are shorter than                    The leash must never come in              In case of a stripped screw, use
150 cm / 5 feet, and especially if you are a child under that height.                  contact with the tuning ma-               the Snowblade repair drill bit (ref.
Retailers and rental operators are obligated to communicate this in-                   chines. Roll up the leash and             001090) and the traditional plastic
formation to their customers.                                                          wedge it in the center of the             repair plugs (ref. 000846). There is
                                                                                       binding with the bails closed.            no jig to make this repair. However,
 Snowblade Liability Indemnification                                                   For maintenance, refer to Ski             the drill bit must be perpendicular
                                                                                       Maintenance on page 47.                   to the surface of the ski. Make sure
Salomon offers liability indemnification to Salomon                                                                              the repair plug is flush with the
                                                                                       If for any reason whatsoever you
Authorized Dealers. Salomon will defend and indem-                                     need to dismount and/or remount           surface of the ski. If it isn’t, file it
nify a Salomon Authorized Snowblade Dealer against                                     the Snowblade binding, you must           down to make it flush.
                                                                                       use a manual screwdriver only
liabilities from claims presented by any customer of
                                                                                       (2.5 +/- 0.5 Nm torque).
the Authorized Dealer arising solely from the use of
Salomon Snowblades, provided:                                                           Replacing Snowblade binding toe clips
A. The dealer purchased the                F. Customers who purchased                   A                                            S
   Snowblades from Salomon.                   Snowblades were given the in-box
B. The dealer has received writ-              pamphlet and any other informa-
   ten notice of a claim involving            tion included in each Snowblade
   Snowblades.                                box.
C. The claim alleges use of the            G. The dealer uses workshop                  D                                            F
   Snowblades resulted in injury.             and/or rental forms the same
D. The dealer provided instructions           as, or equivalent to, Salomon
   recommended by Salomon on                  forms with currently approved
   the use of the equipment to the            Liability Release Language for
   purchaser or user.                         Snowblades.                               G                                            H
E. The purchaser or user was ad-           H. A copy of the properly completed
   vised that the Snowblade sport,            workshop form or rental form,
   like many other recreational activi-       including a signed release, is sub-
   ties, involves inherent and other          mitted.
   risks of injury and death, and that:    I. Any other helpful information             J                                            K
   • The Snowblade binding is a               such as a Ski Patrol Incident
      non-releasable binding.                 Report Form is submitted.
   • Adult snowblade models                J. The dealer notifies Salomon in
      (85 cm and longer), are not             writing within ten days of the date
      recommended for people less             on which the dealer first receives        L                                            :
      than 5 feet tall (1.5 meters) and       written notice of the claim.
      especially not for children less     K. The dealer cooperates fully in the
      than 5 feet tall (1.5 meters).          investigation, litigation and/or
   • The leashes provided with                settlement of the claim.
      Snowblades must be worn at           Salomon may terminate indemni-              • Put the toe clips in the open posi-         unit as to allow for it to be put on in
      all times.                           fication, with respect to Salomon             tion by moving the central roller or        the future. Fig. H
   • Snowblades are not designed           Snowblades, upon providing written            the adjustment knob without going       •   Place the new toe clip in its slot
      for backcountry or deep snow         notice to the dealer.                         to the maximum. Fig. A                      on the support and pull it upwards
      applications.                                                                    • Loosen the 4 screws on the front            (while holding the front part of the
                                                                                         part of the binding using a hand            binding to keep it from bending too
 Snowblade Binding > Large sizes compatibility                                           screwdriver. Fig. S                         much) to snap it on. Fig. J
                                                                                       • Pull the toe clip upward to lift        •   Remove the screwdriver. Fig. K
The Snowblade binding mounted              nal gray toe bails. This kit is available     up the front of the binding about       •   Press down hard on the front part
on the retail products can accommo-        as a spare part under the reference           10 mm, and insert a screwdriver             of the binding to make sure it is flat
date boot sizes up to 30 Mondopoint        891974.                                       laterally between the board and the         against the board (this procedure
(for traditional Alpine boots)             Caution: Mounting these specific wire         toe clip support piece. Fig. D              helps to make sure the toe clip is in
and 29 Mondopoint (for specific            bails for large sizes no longer allows      • Stop pulling upward and now apply           the proper position on its support).
Snowblade boots).                          you to use the conversion chart for           downward pressure, always act-              Fig. L
To allow the Snowblade bind-               adjusting the Snowblade binding.              ing on the same toe clip, so as to          The toe clip support should be flat
ings to accommodate sizes up to            Be careful not to strip the screws            unsnap it from its support. Fig. F          against the board.
34 Mondopoint for the retail binding,      when installing the longer bails!           • Slide the toe clip forward and re-      •   Tighten the 4 screws with a hand
Salomon offers a wire bail replace-                                                      move it. Fig. G                             screwdriver using a 2.5 +/- 0.5 Nm
                                           For this reason, only use a manual
ment kit.                                                                              • Take hold of the toe clip for large         torque. Fig. :
                                           scewdriver for loosening and tighten-
This kit for large sizes consists of two                                                 sizes and orient the toe clip + lever       Follow the same procedure for the
                                           ing the screws.
black wire bails to replace the origi-                                                                                               other binding.
SKI/SNOWBLAdE                                                                                                                                 snowblade > 

SNOWBLAdE > Mounting, Maintenance & Repair (continued)
 Replacing the Snowblade leash                                                          Replacing Snowblade tip protectors
                                                                                       MiniMax - Snowblade 99                                        making sure the rivet is flush
Spare part ref. S90405.                     4. Squeeze both sides of the rivet
                                                                                       • Drill the rivets with a 4 mm di-                            with the tip protector.
1. Remove the leash from the bail.             together onto the leash (with
                                                                                         ameter ‘carbide’ drill bit.                                 Do not use a hammer for this
2. Put the replacement leash                   pliers, vise...).
                                                                                       • Put on the new tip protector by                             operation.
   around the heel bail.                    5. The rivet is in place when it no
                                                                                         aligning the holes with the ones                          • The rivet is in position when
3. Put both parts of the rivet in the          longer turns in the leash.
                                                                                         on the blade.                                               there is no free play.
   holes of the leash.                         do not mount the rivet with
                                                                                       • Insert the male part of the rivet                         SB Ten
                                               a hammer.
                                                                                         in the holes on the base side.                            • Loosen the 2 screws with an
                                                                                       • Put the female part of the rivet
 Storing Snowblade                                                                       in the holes on the top surface
                                                                                                                                                     alen key ø 4 mm.
                                                                                                                                                   • Place the new tip and line up the
If storing for an extended length of        Store them in a dark, dry, venti-            side.                                                       holes tip with holes of the ski.
time, keep the heel bail in a high          lated area.                                • With multi-purpose pliers or a                            • Tighten the 2 screws with the
position to avoid any damage to                                                          vise, squeeze both parts together                           alen key ø 4 mm (2.5 +/– 0.5 Nm
the plastic parts.                                                                                                                                   torque).

The Snowblade binding is designed to be used with alpine ski boots.                    due to their shape (shell width, prominent shape) certain types of
Most Hiking and Snowboarding boots, whose outsoles conform to the                      boots are not for use with the snowblade binding. In this case, dO
ASTM, DIN, ISO norms, can also be used.                                                NOT USE THE SNOWBLAdE.
You must clean the Snowblade binding and the boot sole before putting
the boot in the binding.

 Adjusting SpeedFit (Rental) Bindings                                                   Replacing the adjustment screw
                                                                                                                                                                  Put the alu insert in the hole in the
A                         S good                        D     Bad                       F              The alu screw insert placed on the
                                                                                                                                                    G             frame designed for this purpose

                                                                                                       same side as the rear carriage
                                                                                                                Front carriage

Use the screw located at the rear end            to prevent the risk of breakage.
                                                                                            Rear carriage (with leash)            Grease present
of the binding to make the adjust-               Fig. D
ment. Fig. A                                5.   Stop tightening the screw once
1. Make the adjustment with a clean              the lever touches the end of the                                                                           5 mm between rear

    boot and no snow on it.                      boot sole.                             H                          Adjust the rear
                                                                                                                   carriage axle on
                                                                                                                                                    J        carriage and plate
                                                                                                                                                                   Carriage                Plate
                                                                                                                   size 330 mm
2. Using a power screwdriver or             6.   Check the adjustment with the
    the drill that you use for mount-            boot in the binding: you should
    ing bindings (4 Nm), separate the            be able to pull the lever back with
    bails to allow for the placement             moderate pressure (3 daN).
    of the boot.                            7.   Once the adjustment is finished,
3. Put the toe clip in the high posi-            remove the boot and read the
                                                                                       Retail Snowblade binding (SF214)
    tion.                                        mark indicated on the scale under                                                                         Same distance: 5 mm when the rear
                                                                                       Tools needed: ruler and Yellow Alpine                                 carriage is adjusted on size 330
4. Move the bails closer together by             the boot platform.
                                                                                       binding grease (reference 000905
    putting the lever in a vertical posi-   8.   On the other Snowblade, align the
                                                                                       – see spare parts catalog).
    tion. Fig. S Important: do not               boot platform with the same mark.
                                                                                       1. Remove the defective screw
    put the bails in the riding position,   9.   Check by putting the other boot
                                                                                       2. Before mounting, put the grease
                                                 in the binding.
                                                                                           (reference 000905) on both ends                         6. Using a ruler, measure the dis-
 Adjusting Snowblade Retail Binding                                                        of the new screw.                                          tance between the rear carriage
                                                                                       3. Put the screw in the 2 carriages:                           and the plate as described below.
The Snowblade bindings have been               ation of the plate that corre-                                                                         This distance must be 5 mm.
                                                                                           be careful not to switch the front
designed to accommodate Alpine                 sponds to the boot sole length                                                                         Fig. J
                                                                                           and rear carriages in relationship
ski boots.                                     in mm.                                                                                              7. Adjust the front carriage by tight-
                                                                                           to the screw. (the rear carriage
1. Measure the boot sole length             3. Check the proper adjustment                                                                            ening/loosening it to get the same
                                                                                           must be on the same side as the
    (in mm) with the Synchro mea-              by placing the boot in the bind-                                                                       carriage/plate distance between
                                                                                           alu insert). Tighten the carriages
    surer (Ref. 001189).                       ing (once the lever is closed, it                                                                      front and back. (make sure you
                                                                                           on the screw sufficiently to make
2. Move the metal bails by using               should exert pressure on the                                                                           don’t change the rear carriage
                                                                                           the mounting easier. Fig. F
    the central roller or the screw            front of the boot and the force                                                                        adjustment during this operation).
                                                                                       4. Mount the screw / carriage unit on
    located at the back of the prod-           to open the lever should be                                                                            Fig. K
                                                                                           the frame of the binding. Fig. G
    ucts with a manual screwdriver             about 3 daN; if this is not the
                                                                                       5. Adjust the axle of the rear carriage
    (5-6 Nm torque) to align the               case, modify the adjustment).
                                                                                           on the size 330 mm as described
    axis of the bail with the gradu-
                                                                                           below. Fig. H
SKI/SNOWBLAdE                                                                            maIntenance & rePaIr > 

 Ski maintenance
Good ski maintenance is just as important for the recreational skier as for the racer. A fine-tuned ski lasts
longer. A well-prepared ski turns better, grips the snow better and glides better on all types of snow.
The ski tune-up involves three steps:
1. daily check-up - at the end of everyday of skiing.
2. Machine tuning - for quick work.
3. Complete hand tuning - for skier’s specific needs.

• Visually check to see if any rust                     • Remove any traces with fine,   • If necessary, sharpen and polish      • Clean the base and wax with
  has developed on the edges.                             220-230 grit sandpaper.          edges using sandpaper wrapped           Swix wax.
                                                                                           around a file.

 Machine tuning
 A                                                       S                                D                                       Fa

Ski check-up                                                                                                                      Fb
• Visually check to determine what needs to be tuned.
• Remove major deep scratches on edges with whetstone (see p. 18 for repairing).
• Remove any traces of wax or grease.
Fill in any holes in the base
(see base repairs on p. 50)
depending on the conditions of the base and materials available:
a) Grind entire base surface. Fig. A                                                     Stone grinding
b) Fill-in scratches with base repair material.                                          For Prolink skis, install the Binding-Bridge kit according to the
c) Repair any large damaged areas with base patch/die.                                   Maintenance Specifics paragraph on page 49.
                                                                                         a) Surface smoothing                    c) Finishing Fig. S
                                                                                         – Place the skis on a flat surface.     – Stone grind to obtain a fine struc-
  Stone grinding the ski base
 Surface Smoothing                         Semi Finishing          Finishing
                                                                                         – Eliminate any excess polyethyl-           ture (when using a belt grinding
 grinding                                  grinding                grinding                 ene on the base with a hand base         machine: use 150 grit belt).
 Rotation speed                            Rotation speed          Rotation speed           plane to decrease the risks of       – Do not use a dirty stone which
 1000 t/mn                                 800 to 900 t/mn         400 to 500 t/mn          contaminating the stone.                 creates fluff/hair.
 Pressure 2,5                              Pressure 2,5            Minimum Pressure      b) Semi Finishing                       d) Beveled/recessed finish
 Ski feed speed                            Ski feed speed          Ski feed speed        – Stone grind until the base be-        For skis with beveled/recessed finish,
 10 m/mn                                   10 m/mn                 10 - 11 m/mn
                                                                                            comes flat and glossy.                   we recommend a straight, fine
 dressing                                  dressing                dressing
 Dressing rate                             Dressing rate           Dressing rate         – Avoid overheating and use of a            stone-ground structured base.
 9 - 12 mm/s                               4 - 16 mm/s             7 - 8 mm/s               dirty stone (lengthwise streaks on   Note: always make the last run in this
 (depending on the condition of the ski)
                                                                                            base are from stone contaminant).        direction: Tip – Tail. Concerning
 dressing speed             dressing speed            dressing speed
 Micro automatic            (1300 t/mn)               (1300 t/mn)                        – Dress the stone regularly to keep         the machine parameters, consult
 (1300t/mn)                                                                                 it in good condition (when using a       the machine manufacturer.
 Values from Wintersteiger machines (Micro 81 – Micro 91) or equivalent ma-                 belt grinding machine: use 80 grit
 chines.                                                                                    belt).

  Ski tuning on beveled/recessed edges                                                   Edge finishing
 Parameter of the          Beveled edge                            Recessed edge         We recommend grinding the edges         • Smooth the edges by hand with
 machine                                                                                 with a cup grinding wheel. Fig. D         a soft stone (Fig. Fa) or Scotch
 Program 1                 Angle 1°                                Angle 1°              • Check the angle adjustment be-          Brite® (Fig. Fb)
 Program from Wintersteiger machine (Trim Disc).                                           forehand.                             • Make sure all burrs are removed
                                                                                         • Make sure the stones are well           and smooth down again, if nec-
                                                                                           lubricated.                             essary.
                                                                                         • Make sure the edges are not           For non equiped retailers they
                                                                                           burnt (brown color).                  can do a classic tuning.
                                                                                         • Check the tuning lengths.
SKI/SNOWBLAdE                                                                      maIntenance & rePaIr > 

 Machine tuning (continued)
 G                                        H                                         J

Lateral finish (Fig. G):                 • A double sided sharpener will           • Remove burrs and polish edges          • Carefully remove all burrs with a
• Lateral finishing with lubricated        maintain the ski’s proper side cut.       with a lubricated Scotch Brite®          soft stone.
  220 belt (or use the smallest grit     • For a performance preparation,            belt machine at a slow speed.          • Quickly wipe the ski to avoid
  possible).                               polish the base edge with a polish-       Fig. J                                   staining from the dried lubricant.
• Pass over the edges 1-2 times            ing stone or whetstone to elimi-        • Be careful to lubricate sufficiently   A well-sharpened ski is always
  depending on the condition of the        nate any file marks on the edges.         to avoid burning the base.             sharper underfoot than at the
  edges.                                                                                                                    extremities of the ski.

 K                                        L                                         :                                        TOOLS:
                                                                                                                             • Wax remover
                                                                                                                             • Iron with thermostat
                                                                                                                             • Wax applicator
                                                                                                                             • Plastic scraper
                                                                                                                             • Brush

Waxing, scraping and brushing
a) Waxing (Fig. K)                       Excess heat (above 120 °C or 248          b) Scraping (Fig. L)                       structure desired) working from
- It’s best to use melted wax.           °F) can be harmful to both wax and        - Remove the excess wax with a             tip to tail.
- Clean the base thoroughly.             ski, and can even cause permanent            plastic scraper from tip to tail to   - A rotating brush removes the struc-
- Make sure the iron is set at the ap-   loss of glide qualities in the base.         leave only a very thin layer.           ture of the base for good glide.
   propriate temperature so that only    - Choose a wax according to the wax       - Remove wax from the base groove          Strap the skis together. Position the
   the wax is melted. (Temperature         manufacturer’s recommendations.            and ski edges as well.                  straps at the base contact points.
   110 °C +/- 5 °C or 230 °F +/-         - Melt the selected wax over the en-      c) Brushing (Fig. :)                     Note: The skis can be stored ready-
   10 °F).                                 tire length of the base, and let the    - Brush the base with a nylon brush      waxed (unscraped) for an extended
                                           wax cool to room temperature.              (or other type depending on the       period of time (e.g. between ski

 Hand tuning
A true bar is the basic tool for         Smoothing the base                        On Beveled/Recessed finish: make          TOOLS:
checking and assessing:                  and edges (Fig. D)                        sure that the beveled and recessed        - Square           - Scotchbrite®
• ski base flatness,                     Classic finish: If damage is only mi-     edge angle is between 1° and 1.5°.        - 20 cm (8 inch)   - Sandpaper
• that the edge is slightly recessed     nor, use a file to tune ; otherwise the   • Round off the tip and tail slightly.      file               (220-320 grit)
  from the base,                         ski must be tuned on a machine.           • Remove any burrs with soft stone        - Whetstone        - Central hold-
                                                                                                                             - Soft stone         ing vise
• the extent of base scratches and       Beveled/Recessed finish: the                or Scotchbrite®.
                                                                                                                             - Scrapers         - Swix wax
  appropriate repair. The edge angle     recommended bevel is between 1°
  checking tool is used to verify                                                  Polishing the edges                       - Brushes
                                         and 1.5°.                                 Polish the edges with a whetstone,
  that the edge has an angle of 90°.                                                                                        de-tuning the edge angle at
                                         Edge sharpening (Fig. D)                  starting first on the base and then
Ski check-up                                                                       the sides.                               the extremities
                                         • Sharpen base edges.
• Check the base and edges of your                                                                                          Important: After all finishing op-
                                         • Sharpen side edges.                     Waxing, scraping and
  skis with a true bar.                                                                                                     erations (by hand or machine) it is
• If repairs are necessary, see in-
                                         On classic finish: make sure the          brushing                                 essential to remove any burrs from
                                         edges are at 90°.                         Follow the same instructions as in       edges and to polish the edges to
  structions on p. 50.
                                                                                   machine tuning.                          ensure good ski performance.

 Cleaning the skis > Warning                                                        Maintenance specifics > Prolink adapter
Pressurized cleaners are prohibited, as well as the following solvents:            Tuning skis with prolink on au-          This new Prolink adapter can
› Acetone                                                                          tomatically programmable ma-             be mounted on the adjustable
› 95° alcohol                                                                      chines and machines with a lead:         Wintersteiger bridge (ref. 2000:
                                                                                   To be able to tune skis with the Y       7217-0111-V01) and is available at
(due to risk of damaging the cosmetics of the top surface of the ski).
                                                                                   and V prolink, we have developed         Wintersteiger under the reference
                                                                                   a specific tuning kit in cooperation     7217-0111- V05.
                                                                                   with the Wintersteiger company.
SKI/SNOWBLAdE                                                                    maIntenance & rePaIr > 0

 Repairing the surface of the ski and snowblade
 A                                       S                                        D                                        F

 G                                       H                                        J                                        K

 L                                       :                                         11                                      12

There are two methods for                   bubbles) to obtain a homoge-         11. Smooth it down with 600 grain        16. Using a dust-free cloth, wipe off
repairing the ski surface:                  neous mixture. Add a small               sand paper. Remove the adhe-             the excess Araldite® to obtain
1) ‘One colored’ paste + Araldite®          quantity of coloring paste (White        sive tape. Fig. L                        a smooth, even surface. Let it
2) ‘Multi colored’ Araldite® + white        DW 0131) to the Araldite® resin.     12. Finish sanding gently in order           dry for 30 minutes. The repair is
   + coloring                               White paste is used as a primer          to obtain a smooth surface. Be           finished. Fig. l
                                            in order to have the desired             careful of the ski’s decor/cos-
Repair process:                             colors afterwards. Gently mix (in        metics.
1. With a cutter, outline the area          order to avoid bubbles) to obtain    Create a decoration
    to be repaired, then cut the top        a homogeneous mixture. Fig. G        13. For the coloring stage, do not try
    surface. Fig. A                     8. Apply thicker than top surface of         creating tone on tone to create       MATERIALS NEEdEd:
2. Result after cutting the top sur-                                                                                       • Araldite® 2011
                                            the ski in the areas to be filled.       the exact color of the ski. Trying    • Araldite® gun 50 ml
    face. Fig. S                            Wait a few moments to eliminate          to reproduce a motif of the ski       • Araldite® coloring paste for
3. With a cutter, score area to re-         bubbles if necessary. Fig. H             design already present else-            smooth color (DW 0131 White,
    pair (fibers) to improve bonding.                                                                                        DW 0133 Red, DW 0137 Black,
                                        9. Put adhesive tape on the area to          where is better and easier. The
                                                                                                                             DW 0132 Yellow, DW 0134 Green,
    Fig. D                                  avoid running. Let it dry for 12         final layer of Araldite® tends to       DW 0135 Blue)
4. To protect top surface, put ad-          hours. Fig. J                            lighten colors. Fig. :                • White paste for undercoating
    hesive tape around the area to      10. After 12 hours of drying, remove     14. Use the Araldite® gun for a             for decoration (DW 0131 White)
    repair. Fig. F                                                                                                         • Felt pen to color the design,
                                            the adhesive tape from the mix-          varnish finish which will protect       type 3 points, permanent
5. Prepare Araldite® resin with gun.        ture. Do not remove the adhe-            the ski surface from cuts from          (Ref: Pantone 87828 -
6. Which type of repair to choose:          sive tape around the area which          the edges. A small quantity of          color number).
a) One-color surface repair                 protects the top surface from            Araldite® is sufficient.              ACCESSORIES:
b) Multicolored surface repair              scratches. Use the flat side of a    15. Apply a fine layer of Araldite®       •   Cutter
7. Add a small quantity of color-           cutter to scrape off the excess          with a cutter to avoid excessive      •   Adhesive tape
    ing paste to the Araldite® resin.       mixture. Fig. K                          thickness. Fig. l 11                  •   Towel
    Gently mix (in order to avoid                                                                                          •   Sand paper, Grain 600

 The TPP top surface                     Base repairs
All the adult and Rental models are     Superficial scratches                    Not very deep scratches or               deep cuts
protected by the TPP (Transparent       Machine tuning will make the             marks to be filled by machine            - Cut out the damaged area with the
Polyamide Protection). Regarding        scratch disappear (see the ski main-     - Pour the polyethylene.                   base patch die.
the Junior models, they are             tenance repair)                          - Wait 10 minutes for the material       - Cut a piece of the base material
protected by TP (Transparent                                                       to harden.                               with the base patch die.
Protection).                                                                     - Remove the excess polyethylene         - Glue it into the damaged area.
                                                                                   with a steel spatula for a flat sur-   - Hold it in place with a clamp and
The transparent tops cover the
                                                                                   face.                                    press repair (glue the pieces with
cosmetics underneath, which
                                                                                 - Proceed with machine tuning.             Loctite® 406 or slow Araldite®).
guarantees the durability of the
                                                                                                                          - Proceed with machine tuning.
SKI/SNOWBLAdE                                                               maIntenance & rePaIr > 1

 Replacing the tip protector
                                                                            2006/2007 Rental Tip Protector           Others rental models use
A                        S                        D
          a                                                                 “Triangle” tip protector (fig. Aa)       rental tip protector range 05
                                                                            compatible with following skis:          ”Triangle” tip protector (fig. Ja)
                                                                            Crossmax V12, Crossmax V800,             compatible with following skis:
                                                                            Equipe SC Race, Equipe GC Race,          Streetracer 600, Rush 800,
          b                                                                 Streetracer 800.                         Rush 600.
                                                                            “Hexagonal” tip protector (fig. Ab)      “Hexagonal” tip protector (fig. Jb)
                                                                                                                     compatible with following skis: X-
F                        G                        H                         compatible with following skis: X-
                                                                                                                     Wing 700, X-Wing 400, Siam 400,
                                                                            Wing Blast, X-Wing 10.
                                                                            1. Check that the tip protector is on    Axess 120.
                                                                               the right position (Salomon logo      1. Insert the tip protector on the
                                                                               on top foil side (fig. S).               ski.
                                                                            2. Set up the tip protector on the       2. Place the 2 screws in the 2 holes
                                                                               lateral groove with a rubber ham-        face the running base and screw
J                                                                              mer (fig. D&F).                          on (1N.m).
          a                                                                 3. Set up the tip protector on the
                                                                               central groove (fig. G).
                                                                            4. Finish the mounting on the sec-
                                                                               ond lateral groove with a rubber
          b                                                                    hammer (fig. H).

 Replacing edges
 A                                    S                                      D

 F                                    G

Repair process:
1. Verify that the ski can be re-        Wedge in place in order to         14. Cover affected area with mold        17. Plane patch area to obtain
   paired.                               maintain a good profile and            release paper and place ski in           proper geometry with base
2. Remove the binding and clean          keep the edge horizontal.              heat press.                              plane or file.
   the ski.                              Fig. F                             15. When the epoxy has cured,            18. Repair any damage to top layer
3. Check the length of the edge to   8. Apply epoxy to affected area            remove the ski from the heat             with a mixture of epoxy and
   be replaced. Fig. A                   and heat slightly with heat gun,       press.                                   colorant.
   Cut out the base where the            concentrating on each wing.        16. Grind base and edge locally.         19. Tune and wax the ski.
   edge must be changed (10 mm       9. Put plastic over cut out area
   beyond) with the base patch die       and insert piece of new base                                                 PARTS
   or cutter (in this case, make a       material.                           MATERIALS                                Reference #   Item Name

   reproducible cut-out). Fig. S     10. Cover the affected area with        •   screw (wood, 1,5 x 15 mm)            S90167 Standard Salomon edges
4. Cut the 2 sides of edges be-          mold release paper and place        •   epoxy                                       for all skis
                                                                             •   epoxy colorant or methane glue       S90190 Wider edge for the
   tween two wings with 45°              ski in heat press. Fig. G           •   mold release paper or PE film               models: X Scream Grom,
   angle, as illustrated.            11. When the epoxy has cured,           •   base patch die (KT Technic)                 X Scream T, Fiveforty,
5. Cut out the edge carefully with       remove the ski from the heat        •   cutter, ruler                               Crossmax 10 T,
                                                                             •   scale model drilling machine with
   cutter or wood chisel, then           press and remove base patch                                                         Equipe T, X Scream 10T,
                                                                                 cutting disc
   roughen the area with 80 grit         and plastic film.                                                                   Crossmax T,
                                                                             •   narrow screwdriver
                                                                                                                             Crossmax Grom
   sandpaper. Fig. D                 12. Reapply epoxy to the affected       •   heat gun
                                                                             •   wood chisel                          J90104 Wider edge for the models:
6. Cut the new edge, trim it and         area.                                                                               Verse 5, Verse 5 Women,
                                                                             •   repair press 200 mm length
   remove the grease.                13. Carefully insert piece of base      •   base plane Wintersteiger, file              X Scream S
7. Place the new edge and screw          material into cut-out area.         •   belt grinder                         891451 Wider edge for the
   2 wings near the tip.                                                     •   stone grinder                               models: Pocket Rocket

                                        SECOnd SKin SHELL
   4 mm                    2 mm         Thin shell construction for the lightest
                            3 mm        and most sensitive boot ever,
    5 mm
                                        offering superior fit & feel                   FIT LEVEL
                            5 mm
    7 mm

                                        SECOnd SKin LAST                                           Close to the foot for
                                        The most anatomical fit, so natural you will               optimal driving precision.
                                        feel it wrapping your foot before you even                 Every ounce of pressure
                                        close the buckles                                          is transferred to the ski.

                                        SEnSiTiVE LinER
                                        Soft sole under metatarsals for great
                                        forefoot sensitivity. Leather-textured liner
                                        for pure sensations & foot envelopment.
                                        Sealed seams & 100 waterproof

                                        REinFORCEd EnERgYZER
                                        Stiff & dynamic reinforcement
                                        that provides a more progressive
                                        & responsive flex

                                        nEW SPACEFRAME SHELL PROFiLE
                                        Multi-layered construction with precise
                                        wall thickness to optimize feeling
                                        and performance: maximum transmission
                                        with minimal material

  The FALCON is characterized by a sharp and fluid design. On one
    hand, we were inspired by animal origins focusing on anatomy,
    muscle tension, the form of tendons (buckle shape) and the feel
 of skin (leather on liner). On the other hand, we wanted to express
        aggressivity with rays forming an arrow just before the foot
                               pointing in only one direction: victory!
BOOT                                                      standards & technIcal features > 

 Standard Boot Sole dimensions > ISO 5355
The Alpine boot soles are standardized and bindings are designed accordingly.
The standard norm concerns not only the shape and dimensions as illustrated, but also the friction coeffi-
cient of the area of the sole which is in contact with the anti-friction plate on the binding.
In practical terms:                               BOOT TOE
The boot manufacturers who display
one of the following markings:
DIN, ISO, ÖN, UNI guarantee that
they use standard norms.
In the absence of any of these,
check first with the boot manufac-
turer. These boots are designed for
use with a pair of classic skis, and
not with a monoski, snowboard or
It is the skier’s own responsibility
if (s)he chooses to take the addi-                   (bottom view)
tional risks.
                                                                                                                              (side view)
When a pair of used boots is
brought in, make sure that any worn
parts are still within the norm.

 LEgENd        (measurements in mm)               BOOT HEEL
         Adult boot        Junior boot
 A         69 ± 2             62 ± 2
 B           70                 65
 C           70                 50
 d*    100 (L < 300 mm)   80 (L < 240 mm)
       120 (L > 300 mm)
              =           90 (L > 240 mm)
  E         5±1                3±1
  F        19 ± 1           16.5 ± 1.5
  g        30 ± 2             25 ± 2
  H        30 ± 1            27.5 ± 2
  I         4±1                3±1
 RA      41.5 ± 3.5           35 ± 3
 RB       18 ± 1.5            16 ± 2
 RC        37 ± 4             27 ± 3
 Rd     36.25 ± 0.75         34.5 ± 1                                                                                                 (bottom view)
*L = boot sole length                                           (side view)

  Boot sole lengths
                                                                                       MONdOPOINT SIZES
 MOdELS                                                                              22     23     24     25     26     27     28     29     30     31     32
                                  15        16      17    18     19    20     21
                                                                                    22.5   23.5   24.5   25.5   26.5   27.5   28.5   29.5   30.5   31.5   33.5
 FALCON/gUN/SCARLET                                                                 265    274    285    295    305    315    326    336
 X WAVE/COURSE 90-80-70                                                             265    275    285    295    305    315    325    335    345    355
 SPK                                                                                              287    297    307    317    327    337
 ELLIPSE                                                                            266    276    286    296    306    316    326    336    346    356
 PERFORMA PP/PU                                                                     267    277    287    298    307    319    329    339    349    359    380
 SyMBIO RENTAL                                                                      263    275    284    296    306    317    326    336    345
 FALCON 60                                                       240   247    257   267    277    287    295    307
 PERFORMA T3                                                                        266    276    285    296    306
 PERFORMA T2                                              240    240   247    259
 PERFORMA T1                      203       203     223   223
BOOT                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 technIcal features > 

   Boot Technical Features Chart
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Buckles &
                                                                Measurements                                                                                                                                                                                                    Shell & Cuff                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Ajustment                         Liner                       Other Options
                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Materials**                                                                                                                                                        Flex                                                                               Quantity                                         Fit

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               l Ajdustable spoiler / (F) Fixed spoiler / (X) Extra padded adjustable spoiler
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Buckles: n Aluminum / (C) Polycarbonate / (B) Both / (P) Polyacetal

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               s Walkadin / Interchangeable (R) rear pads / (B) rear + front pads
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             n Spaceframe / (P) Spaceframe shell profile / (F) FS Spaceframe

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               s 3D Buckle (n) New 3D Buckle / (A) Auto 3D Buckle (shell)
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             s Carbonlink / (E) Reinforced Energizer / (R) Rear Energizer
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Polyamid/Polyethylene rear support & forward lean wedge

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Canting (1) Single / (2) Double / (d) Double dismountable
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Specific cuff (W) W / (J) Junior / (X) XWave / (R) Rush W

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               n Shock absorbing custom sole / (D) 3D shock absorber
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               l Aluminum / (T) Titanium / (P) Plastic / (B) Alu/plastic
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Last: l Performance / (S) Sport / (L) Leisure / (K) SPK
                                                                                                                                           Canting adjustment compared to original position (°)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               n 1st tooth catch / (T) Tool free catches adjustment

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               My CF (W) World Cup / (R) Race Sensitive / (P) Pro
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             s Sensifit / (d) Sensifit 2D / (V) Oversize Sensifit

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               My CF (F) Performance / (S) Sport / (C) Comfort
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               (E) Extended levers / (V) Overshaped buckles

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               (F) Faux fur / (P) Polar fleece / (B) both
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             l A.C.T. / (S) Second Skin last & shell

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Lowerleg buckles teeth adjustment
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             n Softex Insert / (d) Deco Insert

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Snowtight, Washable Shoe liner
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               (A) Autofit / (T) Thermic Fit

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Women specific options
                                                                                          Forward lean eangle (°)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Textile lower leg strap
                                                                 Weight / foot (in kg)*

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Toe box and Shin pad
                                                                                                                                                                                                      Lower shell / Sensifit

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Warranty (1-2 years)
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               3D asymetrical strap
                                                                                                                    Original canting (°)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Strap Width (mm)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Canting flex rivets
                                             Mondopoint sizes

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Ski/Walk position
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Loop on tongue

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Rental bar code
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Micro buckles

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Sanitized sole
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Air shin pilow
                                                                                                                                           Delta h (mm)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Cuff / Spoiler

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Vario buckles
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Easy buckles

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Heel wedge
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Racing Kit

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Flex index

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Flat seal

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Slick fit
                      Falcon X2 S-LAB      23.5/29.5             2,00                      14                       2,5                        14                                                     PUET                         PUET                                                                       PU s                                n                       l                     Soft                      P            s                               4                        T   E   45        L             F W                                     R                            S
                      Falcon RACE          24/29.5               1,74                      16                       2,5                    ±1° 15                                                     PUET                     BI-MAT PUET                                                                    PU s                                n                       l                     120          E            P            S                           F   4                        T   E   45 D N L      D         F R                         L           R                            S

                      Falcon 10            24/29.5               1,75                      16                       2,5                    ±1° 15                                                     PUET                         PUET                                                                       PU s                                n                       l                     110          E            P            S                         n F   4                        T   E   45 D N L      D         F R                         L                                        S
                      Falcon 9             25/29.5               1,72                      16                       2,5                    ±1° 15                                                     PUET                         PUET                                                                       PU s                                n                       l                      90          E            P            S                           F   4                        T   E   35      N L   2           P                         L                                        S
                      instinct 9           22/27.5               1,50                      16                       2,5                    ±1° 15                                                     PUET                         PUET                                                                       PU s                                n                       l                      80          E            P            S                           F W 4                        T   E   35      N L   2           P                         L                                        S
                      X Wave 10            24/31.5               2,20                      14                       2,5                    ±1° 14                                                 BI-MAT PUET                  BI-MAT PUET                  l                                                 PU s                                n                       S                     110          s            n            l           s             n     4                        T       45      s L n D         F P                         L               R       l                S
                      X Wave 9             25/31.5               2,18                      14                       2,5                    ±1° 14                                                 BI-MAT PUET                  BI-MAT PUET                  l                                                 PP s                                n                       S                     100          s            n            l           s             n     4                        T       35      s L n 2               F                     L               R       l                S
                      Rush 9               22/27.5               1,94                      14                       2,5                    ±1° 14                                                 BI-MAT PUET                  BI-MAT PUET                  l                                                 PP s                                n                       S                      90          s            n            l           s             n   W 4                        T       35      s L n 2               F                     L       P       R       l H W            S

                      X Wave 8             25/31.5               2,13                      14                       2,5                    -1° 14                                                  BI-MAT PU                   BI-MAT PUET                  l                                                 PP s                                n                       S                      90          s            n            l           s             n     4                        T       35      s L n 1               S                     L               R       l                S
                      Rush 8               22/27.5               1,85                      14                       2,5                    -1° 14                                                  BI-MAT PU                   BI-MAT PUET                  l                                                 PP s                                n                       S                      80          s            n            l           s             n   W 4                        T       35      s L n 1               S                     L       B       R       l H W            S
                      X Wave 7             25/31.5               2,15                      14                       2,5                    -1° 14                                                  BI-MAT PU                        PU                      l                                                 PP s                                n                       S                      80          s            n            l           s                   4                        T       25      s L n 1               C                     L               R       l                S
                      Rush 7               22/27.5               1,85                      14                       2,5                    -1° 14                                                  BI-MAT PU                        PU                      l                                                 PP s                                n                       S                      70          s            n            l           s                 W 4                        T       25      s L n 1               C                     L       P       R       l H W            S
                      X Wave 6             25/31.5               2,15                      14                       2,5                    -1° 14                                                  BI-MAT PU                        PU                      l                                                 PP s                                n                       S                      80          s            n            l           s                   4                        T       25      s L n 1                     A               L               R       F                S
                      Rush 6               22/27.5               1,85                      14                       2,5                    -1° 14                                                  BI-MAT PU                        PU                      l                                                 PP s                                n                       S                      70          s            n            l           s                 W 4                        T       25      s L n 1                     A               L       P       R       F H W            S
                      Ellipse 8            25/31.5               2,30                      16                       2,5                    -1° 16                                                  BI-MAT PU                    BI-MAT PU                   l                                                 PP s                                n                       S                      80           R                        l             V                 3                        l   E   30      A L n 1               F         Q           L W             s       l     S          S
                      Siam 8               22/27.5               2,09                      16                       2,5                    -1° 16                                                  BI-MAT PU                    BI-MAT PU                   l                                                 PP s                                n                       S                      70           R                        l             V               W 3                        l   E   30      A L n 1               F         Q           L W     F       s       l H W S          S
                      Performa 8           25/32.5               1,96                      16                       2,5                    -2° 18                                                      PU                           PU                      l                                                 PP s                                n                       L                      85                       n                          D           n   X 4                        l       35      s L T 1               F                 S   L               s       l                S
                      irony 8              22/27.5               1,72                      16                       2,5                    -2° 22                                                      PU                           PU                      l                                                 PP s                                n                       L                      65                       n                          D           n   R 4                        l       35      s L T 1               F                 S   L       F       s       l H W            S
                      Performa 7.5         25/33.5               1,79                      16                       2,5                    -2° 18                                                      PU                       BI-MAT PL                   l                                                 PP s                                n                       L                      75                       n                          D                 4                        l   E   35      s L T 1               S             A   S   L               s       F                S
                      irony CF 7.5         22/27.5               1,60                      16                       2,5                    -2° 22                                                      PU                       BI-MAT PL                   l                                                 PP s                                n                       L                      65                       n                          D               W 4                        l   E   35      s L T 1               S             A   S   L       B       s       F H W            S

                      Performa CF 7        25/33.5               1,65                      16                       2,5                    -2° 18                                                      PL                       BI-MAT PL                   l                                                 PP s                                n                       L                      75                       n                          D                 4                        T       35      s L T 1               S             A   S   L               s       l                S
                      irony CF 7           22/27.5               1,60                      16                       2,5                    -2° 22                                                      PL                       BI-MAT PL                   l                                                 PP s                                n                       L                      65                       n                          D               W 4                        l E     35      s L T 1               S             A   S   L       B       s       l H W            S
                      Performa 6           25/32.5               1,64                      16                       2,5                        18                                                      PL                       BI-MAT PL                   l                                                 PP s                                n                       L                      65                       n                          D                 4                        l E     35        L T                 C             A   S   L               s                        S
                      irony 6              22/27.5               1,50                      16                       2,5                        22                                                      PL                       BI-MAT PL                   l                                                 PP s                                n                       L                      65                       n                          D               W 4                        l E     35        L T                 C             A   S   L       B       s         H W            S
                      Performa 5           25/32.5               1,58                      16                       2,5                        18                                                      PL                       BI-MAT PL                                                                     PP s                                B                       L                      65                       n                          D                 4                        B E     25        L T                       A           S   L               s                        S
                      irony 5              22/27.5               1,40                      16                       2,5                        22                                                      PL                       BI-MAT PL                                                                     PP s                                B                       L                      55                       n                          D               W 4                        B E     25        L T                       A           S   L       P       s         H W            S
                      Performa 4           25/32.5               1,53                      16                       2,5                        18                                                      PL                       BI-MAT PL                                                                     PP s                                C                       L                      55                       n                          D                 2 2                      B E     25        L T                       T               L               B                        S
                      irony 4              22/27.5               1,35                      16                       2,5                        22                                                      PL                       BI-MAT PL                                                                     PP s                                C                       L                      45                       n                          D               W 2 2                      B E     25        L T                       T               L       P       B         H W            S
                      Falcon 100           22/27.5               1,54                      16                       2,5                    -1° 15                                                      PU                           PU                                                                        PU s                                n                       l                     100           P S                                                  F J 4                        l E     35      N L n 1               C                     L                                        S
                      Course 90            22/27.5               1,87                      14                       2,5                        14                                                      PU                           PU                                                                        PP s                                n S                                            90          snls                                                    J 4                        l E     25      s L n                       A                               R                        S
                      Course 80            22/27.5               1,73                      14                       2,5                        14                                                      PU                           PL                                                                        PP s                                n S                                            80          snls                                                    J   4                      l E     25        L n                       T                               R                        S
                      Course 70            22/27.5 1,50 14 2,5                                                                                                           14                            PU                           PL                                                                        PP                                    C S 70 s n l s                                                                                                               J      4       P        25       L                         T                               R

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        size 24

                      Falcon 60            18/26.5 1,03 10                                                               1                                               13                             PL                          PL                                                                        PP                                    C l 70                                                                                                                       J      4       P       25
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         from                               T                               B                        S
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        size 24

                      Performa T3          22/26.5               1,27                      21                            3                                                                             PL                           PL                                                                        PP                                  C                       L                     30                                                                               J      3   P                                               T                               B                         S
                      Performa T2           18/21                0,74                      14                            4                                                                             PL                           PL                                                                        PP                                  C                       L                     20                                                                               J      2   P                                               T                               B                         S
                      Performa T1           16/18                0,69                      15                                                                                                          PU                                                                                                     PP                                  P                       L                      /                                                                               J        1 P                                               T               L               B                         S
                      X Wave 880           25/31.5               2,15                      14                       2,5                    -1°                           14                        BI-MAT PU                        PU                      l                                                 PP s                                n                       S                     80           snl                                   s                               4        T           25        s L      1                T               L     S         R       F           C     A
                      Rush 880             22/27.5               1,85                      14                       2,5                    -1°                           14                        BI-MAT PU                        PU                      l                                                 PP s                                n                       S                     70           snl                                   s                             W 4        T           25        s L      1                T               L     S         R       F H W       C     A
                      Ellipse 770          25/31.5               2,30                      16                       2,5                    -1°                           16                        BI-MAT PU                        PU                      l                                                 PP s                                n                       S                     70           R  l                                  V                               3        l       E   30          L    n 1                T                     S         B       l           C     A
          U.S. only

                      Siam 770             22/27.5               2,09                      16                       2,5                    -1°                           16                        BI-MAT PU                        PU                      l                                                 PP s                                n                       S                     60           R  l                                  V                             W 3        l       E   30          L    n 1                T                     S P       B       l H W       C     A
                      Performa 660         25/32.5               1,78                      16                       2,5                                                  18                            PU                           PU                                                                        PP s                                n                       L                     60             nl                                  D                                    4   l       E   25          L    n                  T               L     S         s                   C     A

                      irony 660            22/27.5               1,60                      16                       2,5                                                  22                            PU                           PU                                                                        PP s                                n                       L                     50             nl                                  D                             W      4   l       E   25          L    n                  T               L     S P       s         H W       C     A
                      Performa 500          25/32                2,19                      16                       2,5                                                  18                            PU                           PL                      l                                                 PP s C                                                      L                     60              l                                  s                                    4   P       E   25          L                       T                     S         B                   C     A
                      irony 500            22/27.5               1,96                      16                       2,5                                                  22                            PU                           PL                      l                                                 PP s C                                                      L                     50              l                                  s                             W      4   P       E   25          L                       T                     S P       B       l H W       C     A
                      Symbio                22/30                1,75                      16                        3                                                                                 PU                           PP                                                                             P                                                      L                      /                                                                                      3   P                                               T                     S         B                   C     A
                      Performa T3 Rental   22/26.5               1,27                      21                        3                                                                                 PU                           PL                                                                             C                                                      L                     30                                                                               J      3   P                                               T                     S         B                   C     A
          U.S. only

                      Performa T2 Rental    18/21                0,74                      14                        4                                                                                 PU                           PL                                                                             C                                                      L                     20                                                                               J      2   P                                               T                     S         B                   C     A
                      gun                  25/29.5               1,78                      16                       2,5                    ±1° 15                                                      PU                           PU                                                                        PU s n                                                      l                     95           E P S                                               D                 4        T       E 45 D         N L        D F R                         L                   n                     S
                      Scarlet              22/27.5               1,58                      16                       2,5                    ±1° 15                                                      PU                           PU                                                                        PU s n                                                      l                     85           E P S                                               D               W 4        T       E 45 D         N L        D F R                         L       P           n                     S

                      SPK                  24/29.5               1,71                      11                        3                         16                                                      PU                           PL                      l                                                    sn                                                         K                   85             F                                   s                               2        l       V 55                          P             Q           L       F       B D X                   T S
                      Foil                 25/31.5               1,85                      14                       2,5                    -1° 14                                                      PU                           PU                      l                                                 PP s n                                                        S                   85           snl                                   s                               4            T     25          s L         1     C                       L               R                         S
                      Mynx                 22/27.5               1,63                      14                       2,5                    -1° 14                                                  BI-MAT PU                    BI-MAT PU                   l                                                 PP s n                                                        S                   75           snl                                   s                             W 4            T     25          s L         1     C                       L               R                         S
                      Flyer                22/27.5               1,44                      14                       2,5                        14                                                      PU                           PP                      l                                                 PP s C                                                        S                   70           snl                                   s                             J   4          P     25            L                       T               L               R                         S

                      Kitten               22/27.5               1,44                      14                       2,5                        14                                                      PU                           PP                      l                                                 PP s C                                                        S                   65           snl                                   s                             J   4          P     25            L                       T               L               R                         S
* Weight based on Mondopoint 26,5 (men) /                                                                                                                                                     **SHELL MATERiAL LEgEnd:                                                                                                                                                                                       PP: Polypropilene
  24,5 (women/junior) except Performa T3 (23,5),                                                                                                                                               ELAST. TP: Elastomere thermo-plastique                                                                                                                                                                        PP/PE: Polypropilene/Polyethylene
  Performa T2 (19.0), Performa T1 (20,0)                                                                                                                                                       PA CFV: Polyamide with fiberglass                                                                                                                                                                             PU: Polyurethane
                                                                                                                                                                                               PA/PE: Polyamide/Polyethylene                                                                                                                                                                                 PUET: Polyurethane ETHER
                                                                                                                                                                                               PE-EVA: Polyethylene EVA                                                                                                                                                                                      PVC: Polyolefine élastomerise
                                                                                                                                                                                               PL: Polyolefine élastomerise                                                                                                                                                                                  TX: Textile
BOOT                                                                           salomon foot measurer > 

 Warning, procedure, and recommendations

Salomon developed a foot measurer        (Alpine, X-C, Hiking, In-line skates,
that will help you provide better cus-   Snowboard) and takes into account
tomer service by being able to rec-      the two fundamental dimensions of
ommend the size that corresponds         both feet.
to the dimensions (length and            › The length (main measurement) :
width) of the skier’s feet. However,       it can be read directly on 5 inter-
using the measurer can never re-           national size scales (US men’s/
place trying on a boot.                    US women’s/ UK / EUR /
The volume fit can be measured in          Mondopoint).
                                         › The width in direct correlation                      S
two dimensions. The morphology of
                                           with the length measured. The         A
the foot and physical sensitivity of
each individual, according to his/her      width measurement is particularly
sports activities and level (comfort/      useful to refine the measurement
performance ratio), are also deter-        in Mondopoint because it orients
mining factors in the choice of size.      the customer towards the .0 sizes
                                           (narrow feet) or .5 sizes (wide
The Salomon measurer can be used
for all Salomon footwear products

1. Have your customer take off           269 mm. Then, to choose between
   his/her shoes and make sure           26.0 and 26.5, you must look at
   that he/she is wearing appropri-      the width scale Fig. D (in this
   ate ski socks (size and thick-        case, make it correspond to the
   ness).                                maximum foot width with size 26).
2. With your customer stand-             A foot that measures 261 mm
   ing up, legs parallel and knees       would fit in size 26.5 (wide foot),
   slightly bent, make sure his/her      whereas a foot that measures 268
   heels and medial side of both         mm can fit in size 26.0 (narrow
   feet are touching the sides of        foot). Fig. F
   the measurer.
                                         NOTE: The increases in
3. Slowly move the length guide
                                         Mondopoint sizes represented by
   Fig. A until it touches the tip
                                         two triangles in a rectangle is made
   of one foot.
                                         to remind you that the boot sole
   IMPORTANT: When you are
                                         lengths change at the whole sizes,
   moving the black transversal
                                         not the half sizes.
   length guide, make sure you
   don’t put any pressure on the         Remember that the size
   toes when measuring the foot.
                                         indicated on the measurer
                                         should be used to help the
   All you need to do is to barely
                                         dealer orient the customer
   touch the end of the longest
                                         towards the proper size.
   toe. Too much pressure on the
   toes could lead to errors in          The final choice as to the appro-
   reading by a few millimeters.         priate size should be left to the
4. Read the size written vertically      customer depending on whether
   where the red line is in the win-     he/she prefers a snug fit or not.
   dow. Fig. S                           In principle, a technical skier who
For Mondopoint, you have to take         appreciates a snug fit will choose
the width into account in the fol-       the size indicated on the measurer,
lowing manner: if the length of          while a ‘recreational’ skier will
the foot measured is situated in         prefer a roomier fit and will choose
this zone, this means the foot           one size higher.
measures between 260 mm and

 Maintenance recommendations
Use a damp cloth to clean the measurer. It is prohibited to use chemical
agents, hot water, pressurized water, gasoline, alcohol, detergents, sol-
vents or aerosols, which could permanently damage the plastic materials
and erase the marks.
BOOT                                                                                                   advanced fIt > 

 Technical description
 Thermoforming                                                                Layer construction
                              A                                                                                      Middle layer: For foot envelopment
                                                                        G                                            and power transmission
                                                                                                                     - Thermoformable PE (CustomFit)
                                                                                                                       or self-molding PU (Autofit)or
                                                                                                                       pre-formed PE (Thermic Fit)
                                                                                                                     Transmission foam coming from the
                                                                                                                     Neoprene family for quick reactions.
                                                                                                                     External layer for contact with the
                                                                                                   External layer    shell: For pressure distribution and
                                                                                          Middle layer               thermal insulation
                                                                                    Internal layer                   - Polyethylene, closed cell foam:
                                                                                                                       insulation, warmth, lightness,
                                                                        S    Internal layer for foot hold:             better fit
                                                                             For warmth and comfort                  - PVC (Thermic + Rental): protec-
                                                                        H    - Polyurethane (PU), open cell foam       tion, ruggedness, durability
F                                                                              envelopment,                          - Sensifit cuff construction for en-
                                                                               breathability,                          velopment of the leg
J                                                                              comfort                               - Supple exterior for contact with
                                                                             High density CustomFit foam for           the shell and foot envelopment
                                                                             superior envelopment.                   - Anatomical tongue

Thermoformable zones:                  Non-thermoformable zones:
A Straight and anatomical              D Asymmetrical and rigid cuff          Women’s specific features
    tongue                               Distributes pressure for instan-                                          Women’s liner with anatomic
- A thermoformable internal side         taneous transmission of efforts.
                                                                                                                   tongues made of highly moldable
  that provides precision and          F Watertight gusset                                                         foams for better shin and instep
  comfort.                                                                                                         comfort in sensitive foot zones.
                                       G Specific cuts for women and
- An external side that is more
                                         men to avoid pressure points                                              A Sliding band
  rigid on the tibia and more sup-                                                                                    Helps the heel slide in.
                                         on the lower calf.
  ple in the flex area for excellent                                                                               S Specific tongue
  pressure distribution without        H More supple zones allow for
                                                                                    S                                 Autofit and CustomFit foams for
  hindering flex.                        easy entry/exit of the boot.
                                                                                                                 D    better shin and forefoot comfort.
                                       J Forefoot – The space in front        F
S Opened ankle area                                                                                                D My CustomFit Performance
  For ideal morphological adapta-        of the metatarsal is not ther-                                               For a total CustomFit.
  tion regardless of the size and        moformable, which allows the                                              F Polar fleece and/or fur
  shape of the bones.                    toes to move freely.                                                         Forefoot warmth.

 Liner Models
 New CustomFit generation                                                     Old CustomFit generation
My CustomFit World Cup:                - Two layers liner: thermoformable    Course CF Pro / CustomFit Pro:          AutoCF: Automoulding foam in the
Best performance                          foam 80  on all sensitive areas   CustomFit technology + bi-material      foot envelopment for exceptional
- Extra low volume Compact Race           (heel + metas + sole).             technology.                             comfort.
  liner (3 layers).                    My CustomFit Sport: Better cus-       100  foot hold and contact with        CustomFit tongue for a better tibial
- Specific World Cup tongue allow-     tomization of the tibia and ankles    the shell                               customization.
  ing shock absorbing.                 - One layer liner: thermoformable     Due to a specific 3 layer performance   Autofit: Comfort, warmth,
My CustomFit Race:                        foam 70  on original areas.       construction.                           insulation and personalized foot
Best performance                       My CustomFit Comfort: Better          3d CustomFit / CustomFit:               envelopment
- Low volume Compact Race liner        tibial customization                  Comfort, warmth and ‘customized’        Self-molding foams allow the liner
  (3 layers).                          - One layer liner: thermoformable     envelopment                             to take on the shape of the foot al-
- Rigid sole.                          foam 60  on basic area (tongue).     Thermoformable foams allow the          lowing anatomical adaptation of the
My CustomFit Performance:                                                    liner to take on the shape of the       foot’s sensitive areas: the tibia, ankle,
Better comfort on the heel, metas                                            foot after a heating procedure is       forefoot and anklebones.
& sole without altering perfor-                                              performed with a special machine        ThermicFit: Comfort and warmth
mance                                                                        designed by Salomon.                    - Pre-formed zones protect the tibia
                                                                             + Thermoformable insole (3D                and the forefoot.
                                                                             CustomFit)                              - A pleasure to slip into due to its
                                                                                                                        construction and materials.
BOOT                                                                                                 advanced fIt > 

 Thermoforming machine > Procedure
Before using the machine for the first time, return the guarrantee card to your Customer Service
Representative. Follow the instructions for the thermoforming machine closely and pay particular attention
to the rules on safety.
To guarantee good thermoforming, we have adapted a thermal sensor to our machines. If something is
abnormal during the heating process, the machine will work alternately. If this is the case, contact the cus-
tomer service in your country. Do not take the machine apart.
This machine is for exclusive use with Salomon CUSTOMFIT liners. Any other use is forbidden.

 Preparing for use (Fig. A-S)

 A                                     S

1. Remove the machine from its        3. Lift the nozzles using the han-       Important: Any insoles used        5. After having read and under-
   box and place it on a flat sur-       dles provided.                        other than the ones received          stood the machine’s instruc-
   face. Verify that the voltage      4. Close the boot’s buckles and          in the boots at the time of           tions, especially those on
   used is the same as indicated         slide the boots onto the noz-         purchase should be removed            safety, you can now plug the
   on the machine.                       zles. Make sure that the top          before the heating procedure          machine in.
2. Lift the hood.                        edge of the boot touches the          begins. Re-install them after
                                         obturator.                            heating to mold the liners.

 Starting the machine

 D                                     F                                     G

Set the timer for 15 mins.                 Wearing normal, low-cut socks    7. Close the buckles with medium        the 10 minute cooling process
Warning: For optimal results, it is        could cause skin reactions to        pressure, not too tight. Fig. D     to simulate the anklebone move-
important that:                            the heating process.             8. Close the strap more firmly.         ments when skiing. Fig. G
- the heating process lasts           2.   Remove the boots from the ma-    9. Tap the heel on the floor to       › It is recommended to wait
  15 minutes. Using the machine            chine.                               make a good impression of the       1/2 hour before skiing with the
  for more than 15 mins can dam-      3.   Close the hood.                      Achilles’ heel. Fig. F              boots, to allow for complete sta-
  age the liner.                      4.   The machine is now available     10. Wait 10 min in a standing posi-     bilization of the thermoformed
- operate the machine with both            for thermoforming another pair       tion.                               liner.
  boots in place.                          of boots.                        11. Remove the boots.                 drying with a machine
                                      5.   Open the boot buckles.           Practical advice
Putting the boot on                                                                                               When drying the CustomFit liners
                                      6.   The boots must be put on im-     › Salomon recommends that no
1. When thermoforming, you                                                                                        with a drying machine, it is im-
                                           mediately following the end of     CustomFit liner be thermoformed
   should only use ski socks that                                                                                 portant to respect the drying time
                                           the 15 min heating cycle.          more than three times.
   have the following character-                                                                                  recommended by the manufacturer
                                           If you feel any discomfort       › To optimize the results of the
   istics:                                                                                                        and that the temperature not ex-
                                           whatsoever when stepping-in,       thermoforming process, it is
- socks that go higher than                                                                                       ceed 40°C.
                                           take your boots off immedi-        recommended that you make
   the top of the boot,
                                           ately.                             several flex movements during
- socks with at least 45% wool.
BOOT                                                                                     boot technologIes > 

Advanced Chassis Technology™                                                    Carbonlink™ Support
A                                        S                                                                                 A rigid carbon arm forming a
                                                                                                                           direct link between the top of
                                                                                                                           the cuff and lower shell for rigid
                                                                                                                           rear support without altering the
                                                                                                                           natural flex.

D                                        F
                                                                                Canting Adjustment (With Lock)
                                                                                The Canting is integrated into the
                                                                                shell for reliable transmission and         +2.5
Fig. A Proven by the world’s top
                                                                                protection. It allows alignment of    +1.5         +3.5
Racers and Freeriders, Salomon
                                                                                the cuff to the skier’s lower leg
Advanced Chassis Technology™ is          Custom Sole Standard                   shape.
the result of 3 years research and       Fig. D The softer factory fit-         - The factory preset position for the
testing to optimise the structure and    ted sole allows the skier to work        canting is + 2,5°
geometry of the sole and sides of        the Chassis for a most sensitive       - First, loosen the internal and
the lower shell.                         feeling and the enhanced ability         external Canting Lock with the
The result is an increased transmis-     to vary the turn radius. (Course,        Hexagonal Key n° 5.
sion and sensitivity that allow you to   X-Wave, Crossmax, Fast & Free          - To adjust inwards to + 1,5°
make the most of the latest shaped       models)                                  (a knock kneed stance), turn the
skis and interfaces.                     Shock absorbing sole                     external adjuster one-half turn.*
Elevated Foot Position                   Fig. F A full-length sole made from    - To adjust externally to + 3,5°        *Note: Never turn both the internal
Fig. S For better leverage and           shock absorbing materials to cush-       (a bow legged stance), turn the       and external adjustments as this will
maximum edge angles. The foot            ion those big landings. (Course Pro,     internal adjuster one-half turn.*     raise the whole cuff without adjusting
position is raised 5 mm.                 1080, X-Wave 10.0 models)              - Re-tighten the canting lock.          the canting.

Buckle Teeth Adjustment                                                         3d Buckle Adjustment
Offers a greater range of lower                                                 The 3D buckle adjustment allows the
leg adjustment (+/- 20 mm):                                                     position of the instep buckle to be
- Loosen the screw with a 3                                                     changed for personalised foot hold:
   mm Hexagonal Key.                                                            - Unscrew the buckle with a 3 mm
- Re-tighten the screw and                                                        Hexagonal Key.
                                                          1 2 3
   buckle teeth in the new                                                      - Position the buckle over the plastic
   position.                                                                      lug on the shell.
                                                                                - Re-tighten in the alternate position.

Micro Buckle Adjustment                                                         Auto 3d Buckle Adjustment
                                                                                                                          a                   b

                                                                                                                          c                   d
Fine tune the buckle closure by turning the part that grips the buckle teeth.

Walkadin Pads
 Walking is easy and safe, skiing                                                                                         - Hold the lock down b
                                                                                Without using any tools, the Auto
 is compatible with alpine DIN                                                                                            - Move the buckle to the desired
                                                                                3D buckle adjustment modifies
 standards. (Ellipse, Performa, e2                                                                                          position c
                                                                                the position of the instep and/or
 models)                                                                                                                  - Release the lock d
                                                                                lower leg buckle to personalize
                                                                                foothold:                                 (Ellipse 10.0 – shell and cuff;
                                                                                - Lift the buckle up a                    Performa – shell only)
BOOT                                                                                boot technologIes > 

                                                                               12                                                                    1
                                                                               11                                                               2

    Loop to tongue            3D shock absorber
    Shin pillow               PU lower shell and
                              PP cuff
    55 mm (XXXL) strap        Micro alu overshaped
                              buckles                                           8
                              Extra padded spoiler
    Toe box
                              My CF PRO liner with
    Interchangeable rear      faux fur
    and front pads
 Specific features

 A                                       S                                  D                                          F

Performance & pleasure                 Salomon Cushioning System           3d shock absorber (Fig. S): The            of the boot (20 lighter) & make it
By riders for riders, the new SPK      The Salomon Cushioning System       addition of a high density pad & 2         feel like an extension of your foot.
boot has been designed to rock         absorbs unwanted                    layers of gel absorbs the impact of        Faux fur (Fig. F): For an extra
the parks and pipes. Make heads        shock to limit leg                  landing shocks.                            comfortable and warm fit.
turn with this unique design, but      and foot injuries.                  Shin pillow: For maximum com-
also 20 lighter for better ma-        Extra padded                        fort & flex.
neuverability with the Salomon         spoiler (Fig. A): EVA pad on the    Freestyle Spaceframe technology
Cushioning System. Hard core jib-      rear spoiler to provide a perfect   (Fig. D): Lightened construction
bers enjoy more jumps and rails in     ratio of comfort & support.         to significantly reduce the weight
the park all day long.

 Adjustments and personalization

 G                                       H                                  J

Overshaped buckles (Fig. G)            XXXL strap (Fig. H)                 Toe box (Fig. J)
Perfect pressure distribution &        55 mm strap to envelop the lower    Free articulation of the toes to al-
powerful heel lock to let your foot    part of the leg & provide freedom   low micro-adjustments of the foot
                                                                                                                       AddITIONAL FEATURES
drive the boot, rather than be         of movement.                        & to keep perfect balance.
                                                                                                                       65       Performance Accessories
trapped inside.
BOOT                                                  boot concePts > falcon / InstInct > 0

BOOT CONCEPTS > (continued)
 Falcon / Instinct / gun / Scarlet
Performance & pleasure                                                                                                                                         J
Experience unequalled on snow sensations with the Falcon boot. Featuring the                         11
new Spaceframe technology that combines sensitivity and transmission for the
first time and the Second Skin Shell for perfect foot envelopment, you’ll feel the                                                                                      :
ski and snow beneath like never before. Feel the power and break into the new
dimension of instinctive performance skiing.
 TECHNICAL dESCRIPTION – FALCON                                                                  6
     Anatomical shell                Canting Lock.
     construction like a             3D wide (XXL) strap.
     “second skin”
     My CF Race Sensitive
                                     3D buckle.                                                G
     liner.                          Custom Sole
     Sensifit™ liner wings.          Adjustable buckle
     Lower shell and cuff
                                     Micro adjustable
     Canting adjustment.                                                                         9

 Specific features
                                                                                                                G                            Sensitive liner (Fig. F)
                                                               D                             F                                               Soft sole under metatarsals for great
                                                                                                                                             forefoot sensitivity. Leather-textured
               S                                                                                                                             liner for pure sensations & foot en-
                                                                                                                                             velopment. Sealed seams & 100
                                                                                             Spaceframe shell profile (Fig. D)               waterproof.
Second skin shell (Fig. A)                      Second skin last (Fig. S)                    Multi-layered construction with pre-            Energyzer (Fig. G)
Thin shell construction for the lightest        The most anatomical fit, so natural          cise wall thickness to optimize feeling         Stiff & dynamic reinforcement that
and most sensitive boot ever, offering          you will feel it wrapping your foot be-      and performance: maximum transmis-              provides a more progressive & re-
superior fit & feel.                            fore you even close the buckles.             sion with minimal material.                     sponsive flex.

 Adjustments and personalization
  H                                                                                                         K                    L                                          :

3d strap (Fig. H)                                                                            SOFTENINg THE BOOT                              5. Slide the cuff upwards of the shell tak-
The internal part of the strap is vertically adjustable. For the tightness to be situated    Even if the flex is more progressive than          ing care not to damage the Carbonlink.
more centrally on the tongue, unscrew the screw (position 1) with a 3 mm hexagonal           with tradtional racing boots, it can be         - First cut the shell along line ‘A’ to re-
key and move the insert into the higher hole (position 2). Re-tighten the screw.             soften further more:                               duce the flex by 5 .
                                                                                             Reversible Method                               - Then if necessary, drill out the hole at
                                                                                             Remove the canting lock screws. This               the base of line ‘B’ and cut out the V
                                                Rear spoiler (Fig. K)                        reduces the flex by 5/10 .                        shape. Reducing the flex by another
Shin plate (Fig. J)                                                                                                                             5/10 .
                                                The rear spoiler (from the performance       Place the plugs from the Racing kit into
Used to reinforce the forward support and                                                                                                    - Reassemble the boot with new Canting
                                                kit) increases rear support (with 3 height   the screw holes on the outer cuff.
stiffens the flex. The height and lateral                                                                                                       mechanism.
                                                settings) and forward lean by + 2°.          Non Reversible Method (Fig. :)
position are adjustable.
                                                - Choose the desired height and attach       This involves cutting the ‘V’ in the top rear
- Choose the forward or internal position
                                                  using the screw provided, in the pre-      of the lower shell where marked. It is first     AddITIONAL FEATURES
  and use a 5,5 mm drill bit to drill the 1st
                                                  drilled hole.                              necessary to remove the cuff as follows:
  hole in the cuff where marked (the shin                                                                                                     Custom Sole Standard
  plate is marked by a cross inside the         delta H lift (Fig. L)                        1. Remove the Liner.                             Carbonlink™ Support
  cuff of the boot).                            The 4 mm heel lift (from the performance     2. Unscrew and remove the canting locks
                                                                                                                                              Buckle Teeth Adjustment
- Choose the desired height and attach          kit) can be used to improve instep/heel         with the Hexagonal Key n° 5.
                                                                                                                                              Micro Buckle Adjustment
  the plate using the “T” insert and bolts      hold and put the skiers weight forward for   3. Remove the canting mechanisms. Use
                                                                                                an 8 mm drill bit from the outside, or a      3d Buckle Adjustment
  provided.                                     faster initiation.
- Align the plate correctly and use as a        - Remove the liner and position the             grinding tool from the inside. Caution,       Canting Adjustment:
  guide to drill the 2nd hole and attach as       wedge in the hole provided in the rear        do not melt the shell as the rivet will       58        Salomon Boot
  shown.                                          of the Custom Sole.                           get very hot.                                           Technologies
                                                                                             4. Remove the hot rivets carefully.              65        Performance Accessories
BOOT                                       boot concePts > x wave / rush / 100 > 1

BOOT CONCEPTS > (continued)
 X Wave / Rush / Foil / Mynx


                                                                                          3                                                                K
     Anatomical shell with      Wide strap                 Canting
     Advanced Chassis           3D buckle                  Spaceframe
     Technology™                                           technology
                                Micro alu buckles
     Carbonlink™                                           Custom sole
     Lateral inserts
                                Adjustable lower leg
                                buckle teeth
     Customfit Pro liner        Sensifit™ shell
     Sensifit liner wings       Canting lock                                                            12         13        A        :

 Specific features
We started with the renowned fit of our Prolink™ boots, improved the envelopment and heel hold, then added the race proven technology of our Course boots:

Perfect Fit thanks to the Sensifit™, the 3D buckle and Advanced Chassis             The main features are: Advanced Chassis Technology™, Carbonlink™ and
Technology liners.                                                                  lateral inserts.
Precise transmission: the latest technology™ from our Course boots al-
lows the skier to make the most of the latest shaped skis.

 Adjustments and personalization > Procedure

 A                                          S                                        D

FOR A PERFECT FIT                         precise and an optimized trajectory,      Adjustable Rear Spoiler (Fig. D)
Sensifit™ (Fig. A)                        resulting from faster turn dynamism.      Customisation of the rear support to
A soft material over the instep for       2 sides in complementary fashion:         suit the shape and size of the skier’s
improved envelopment and easier           the external brings precision, fluid-     leg and increase the rear support:
step-in.                                  ity and heightened feelings; the          - Loosen the screw with a 5 mm
                                          internal guarantees precise control,         Hexagonal Key,
                                          power and speed.                          - Choose the height (the higher the      AddITIONAL FEATURES
Spaceframe Technology (Fig. S)                                                         spoiler, the stronger the rear sup-   Advanced Chassis Technology™
The right amount of the right mate-       Adjusting the flex
                                                                                       port),                                Carbonlink™ Support
rial at the right place:                  (X Wave 10 & Crossmax only)
                                                                                    - Tighten the screw.                     Walkadin Pads
- reinforcement of the upper cuff         Soften the flex by:
                                                                                                                             Buckle Teeth Adjustment
   with softex + higher cuff,             - Removing the Canting locks using
                                                                                                                             3d Buckle Adjustment
- next step of the A.C.T.: softening        a 5 mm Hexagonal Key,
                                                                                                                             Micro Buckle Adjustment
   of the external face.                  - Insert the plugs in the holes (avail-
                                                                                                                             Canting Adjustment
                                            able as spare parts).
A maximized ski/snow contact, a                                                                                              58       Salomon Boot
“2 foot” control that is much more                                                                                                    Technologies
                                                                                                                             65       Performance Accessories
BOOT                                                       boot concePts > ellIPse / sIam > 

BOOT CONCEPTS > (continued)
 Ellipse / Siam
                                                                                                 2                                                  F
                                                                                                 6                                           D

                                                                                            8                                                        G
     Coupé chassis +              Auto 3D buckles              Adjustable lower leg
     Energyzer                    (shell & cuff)               buckle teeth
     CustomFit Pro liner          Adjustable rear              Oversize Sensifit™
     with shoe liner +            spoiler                      Ski / Walk adjustment
     Quicklace                    Wide strap                   Canting
     Liner wings                  3 injected micro alu         Walkadin pads
     Step-in strap                buckles
                                                                                                     12 A                     13

 Specific features                                                                        Adjustments and personalization > Procedure
 A                                           S                                            D                                    F


Performance & pleasure                         boot on without tightening the lace        G                                    H
for advanced to expert skiers who              on the liner until after a couple of
are looking for performance and total          runs down the ski slopes. Indeed,
transmission. Ellipse is the perfect           the Quicklace is very efficient and               WALK
tool for the widest spectrum of per-           technical.                                                          SKI
formance skiing enthusiasts.                   Tighten it according to your skiing
A new generation of Salomon boots              level (if you tighten it too much, like
designed for the shaped skis and               a world cup racer, you may experi-        Adjustable rear spoiler Fig. D       (Push the button down for the
inspired by the evolution of the ski           ence discomfort).                         Customize the rear support to suit   WALK position)
technique.                                   - With this new type of liner, you can      the shape and size of your leg and   Step in strap Fig. H
                                               occasionally walk on packed snow          increase the rear support:           The Step-in strap offers the pos-
Coupé chassis Fig. A
                                               or around the ski resort for short        - Loosen the screw with a 5mm        sibility to put the boot on effort-
A new chassis construction that is
                                               periods of time on smooth terrain.          Allen wrench.                      lessly, with only one hand.
perfectly adapted to the current evo-
                                               Caution: This does not eliminate the      - Choose the height (The higher
lution of skiing:
                                               risk of slipping.                           the spoiler the stronger the
- The layers of the shell are rein-
                                             - Washable liner: Your walking liner          rear support).
   forced laterally to ensure good
                                               can easily be machined washed at          - Tighten the screw.
   control and ideal steering.
                                               30°C (86°F). After washing, place         Oversize Sensifit™ Fig. F             AddITIONAL FEATURES
- The right materials are added in the
                                               it 50 cm (20 in.) from a radiator all     The Oversize Sensifit™, designed      Advanced Chassis Technology™
   right places to obtain the best syn-
                                               night to dry.                             with supple material, offers easy     Walkadin Pads
   thesis between comfort and high
                                             - Liner adjustment strap (b): This          entry/exit and an optimum level       Buckle Teeth Adjustment
                                               strap provides the liner with a           of comfort.                           Auto 3d Buckle Adjustment
Shoe liner + Quicklace Fig. S                  tighter fit in the lower leg area.
                                                                                         Ski/Walk adjustment Fig. G            Micro Buckle Adjustment
- Perfect foothold adjustment with
                                                                                         The easy-to-use SKI/WALK button       Canting Adjustment
  the Quicklace (a). IMPORTANT: Do
                                                                                         releases the cuff for relaxing and    58       Salomon Boot
  not pull it too tight. This is only an                                                                                                Technologies
  adjustment. It is best to put your                                                     easy walking.
                                                                                                                               65       Performance Accessories
BOOT                                              boot concePts > Performa / Irony > 

BOOT CONCEPTS > (continued)
 Performa / Irony
 Specific features
Performance & pleasure                                                               4                                                   D
Performa boots are great for skiers      A
who are looking to progress in tech-
nique and style.
A 4 buckle overlap construction
reinforced by a transmission circuit    Adjustments to adapt the boots to                                                                K
on the internal side / rearward sup-    the skier’s morphology and his ski
port / sole.                            progresses.                                                                                 7
The anatomical shell and the new        Shin pillow: (Fig. A)
liner provide envelopment, warmth       A new vertically opened tongue to go                                                             L
and comfort.                            around your shin with air/foam cush-
                                        ioning pads to absorb shocks all day   10                                                               H
                                        long: a real air bag for your tibia!

    Overlap shell             Adjustable rear           Adjustable lower leg
    Spaceframe                wedge                     buckle teeth            2
    technology                Wide strap                Sensifit™
    My CustomFit              Micro alu buckles         Canting
    Performance liner         Extended lever            Walkadin pads
                                                                                     11                              A                   11

 Adjustments and personalization > Procedure
 S                                                                              D                                     F

 G                                      H

Sensifit™ 2d (Fig. S)                   To adjust the height of the rear       A tool free catches adjustment        Canting (Fig. H)
The Sensifit™ 2D with ‘petal’ con-      support (3 or 4 positions depend-      (Fig. G)                              Allows alignment of the cuff to the
struction provides the widest open-     ing on the model):                     Upper catches are also adjustable,    skier’s lower leg shape.
ing for putting on and taking off       - Loosen the plate screw with a        with or without tools, to adapt the   To adjust the Canting, turn the
the boot rapidly and effortlessly.        5 mm Hexagonal Key.                  volume of the upper cuff to your      adjuster 1/2 turn using a 5 mm
Rear Support (Fig. D)                   - Adjust the plate according to the    calves.                               Hexagonal Key.
Adjust the rear support to suit the       desired height.                      - To move upper catches, turn
shape and size of the skier’s leg       - Tighten the screw.                     them 90°, move them laterally        AddITIONAL FEATURES
and increase the support.               Two extended lever buckles               (+ 15mm), then place them back       Advanced Chassis Technology™
- High position: more direct and        (Fig. F)                                 to their horizontal position.        Walkadin Pads
  firmer support.                       For 30 less effort when closing.      - To move lower catches, loosen        Buckle Teeth Adjustment
- Low position: softer and more                                                  the screw with a 3mm Allen           Auto 3d Buckle Adjustment
  progressive support.                                                           wrench, position the catches in      Micro Buckle Adjustment
                                                                                 the desired position (+/- 20mm)
                                                                                                                      58       Salomon Boot
                                                                                 and tighten the screw.                        Technologies
                                                                                                                      65       Performance Accessories
BOOT                       boot concePts > women’s & symbIo rental > 

BOOT CONCEPTS > (continued)
 Women's Models
 Specific Features                                                                           3                                               2

  A                                                          S                                                                                   4


Lining (Fig. A)
                                                                                                  8                  1                       8
All our women’s boots are cozy
and warm with faux fur or polar                                                       TECHNICAL dESCRIPTION – IRONy 7.0 CF
fleece lining.                             Footboard (Fig. D)                                Overlap shell            W adjustable rear                   Sensifit 2D
Lower rear support (Fig. S)                - Narrower heel pocket to improve                 W My CustomFit           wedge                               Walkadin pads
                                                                                             Performance liner        360° strap                          W footboard
Anatomic cuff with lower rear                heel hold, and increased heel lift              - slick fit              Micro alu / plastic                 Spaceframe
support for Women’s calves, and              providing perfect skiing stance.                - specific tongue        buckles
                                                                                             - polar fleece on                                            technology
adjustable soft spoiler for better fit     - Shock absorbing: filters vibra-                   forefoot               Adjustable lower leg
and comfort.                                 tions for all day comfort.                      - fur liner              buckle teeth

 Symbio™ Rental Model
 Adjustments and personalization > Procedure                                                                                    5

Lower leg adjustment                          A
It is possible to change the lower leg
adjustment according to the mor-                                                                                                4
phology of the skier’s lower leg.
› Adjusting the lower leg cable
- Place the lower leg cable in the
                                                                                                                                                         SyMBIO 440
     desired setting of the buckle teeth                                                                                        1                           Plastic buckles
     on the medial side of the boot.
                                                                                                                                                            PU Shell
     (Fig. A)
                                                                                                                                                            Replaceable toe
Longer or shorter cables are avail-                                                                                                                         and heel pads
able from the spare parts catalog to                                                                                                                        Adjustable lower
                                                                                                                                                            leg lever
adapt to all shapes and sizes.
                                                                                                                                                            Thermic liner
                                                                                                                                                            Bar code integrated
                                                                                                                                                            to the liner
                                                                                             3                   2                  3

 Repairs > Procedure
Replacing the lower leg buckle                b. Put the buckle into place and       Replacing the buckle and/or forefoot                Using a T-nut. Put the threaded
tooth insert                                     install the screw tightly. The      buckle teeth                                        insert into the rivet hole from the
1. Remove the liner and open the cuff            prongs on the threaded insert       1. Remove the liner.                                inside of the boot. Put the buckle
   completely.                                   should be completely imbedded       2. Drill the rivets in the buckle or the            in place and tighten completely.
2. Drill the rivet inside the shell.             into the cuff material.                damaged buckle teeth.                            The prongs on the threaded insert
3. Remove the damaged buckle tooth            c. Loosen the screw.                   3. Remove the damaged buckle or                     should be completely imbedded in
   insert and its rivet.                      d. Put the washer into place. This        the buckle teeth and the rivet. Save             the material.
4. Put a new buckle tooth insert in              will prevent the tip of the screw      the washer.                                 To remove the liner
   place and proceed as follows :                from going too far.                 4. Put in a new buckle or buckle teeth         Turn the clip on the inside of the liner
   Using a T-nut                              e. Tighten completely.                    and attach with a rivet or T-nut.           1/4 turn with a screwdriver.
   a. Place the threaded insert in the        Using a Rivet. Use a rivet on the         Using a rivet. Use a new rivet and
       rivet hole on the inside of the        outside and a washer inside and           the original washer and proceed                 AddITIONAL FEATURES
       boot.                                  proceed with riveting.                    with riveting.                                  65           Performance Accessories
BOOT                       foot anatomy & fIt > notIons of anatomy > 

 Notions of anatomy
A basic knowledge of anatomy of the foot is essential if you are going to understand and solve your custom-
ers’ problems and needs since each foot is unique.
 The bones of the foot                                                               Types of legs
                                          A. Posterior tarsus
                                             1. Calcaneus
                                             2. Talus (Astragalus)
                                             3. Trochlear surface
                                          B. Anterior tarsus
                                             4. Navicular bone (Tarsal
                                             5. Cuboid bone
                                             6. 3 cuneiform bones
                                          C. Metatarsus
                                             7. 5 metatarsal bones
                                          d. Toes
                                             8. 14 phalanges

 distortion of foot when weighted
                                                                                       normal knees.                  Varus knees.               Valgus knees.

                                                                                    Some people naturally have varus or      The canting adjustment by canting
                                                                                    valgus knees. The boot cuff follows      the cuff allows the boot to follow
                                                                                    the profile of the leg. Therefore, the   the morphology of the leg to keep
                                                                                    boot sole forms an angle with the        skis flat
                                                                                    ground (i.e.: the ski is not flat).
                                                                                    The ski boots can be adapted to the
                                          - the axis between the talus (as-         shape of the leg by canting the cuff.
                                            tragalus) and calcaneus becomes
When the foot is weighted (standing         off-centered which increases the
position), it can change in size:           surface area at the base of the foot.
- lengthwise, it can get 5 mm longer,     Therefore, to be accurate, feet should
- widthwise, it can get 12 mm wider.      be measured when the person is
When the foot is flexed, we notice:       standing with his/her weight distrib-
- the circumference of the ankle          uted on both feet and knees slightly
  increases about 2 mm,                   flexed.

 Types of feet
                                                                                    A deeper analysis of the customer’s feet (Fig. F) is necessary to observe
 F                                                                                  the possible deformations that can become problem areas. Salomon has
                                                                                    parts at your disposal that will help you to easily adapt the boots to these
                                                                                    High arches:                             High instep:
                                                                                    The skier needs an arch support          You can grind the footboard (Falcon
                                                                                    that can relieve pressure on ‘over-      and X Wave) to increase the vol-
                                                                                    loaded’ areas.                           ume. This sole is realized in grind-
                                                                                    Arch supports can be attached to         able PU foam. To increase the
     Pronated                         normal                  Supinated             the footboards. (Fig. G)                 volume of the boot or to change the
      flat foot                        foot                high-arched foot                                                  position of the foot.
                                                                                    Supinated or pronated feet:
                                                                                    This is the deviation of the foot’s      Caution, grind on the top surface
 G                                         H                                        vertical axis towards the medial or      only. Grinding the base will effect
                                                                                    lateral side, which can lead to prob-    the interface with the Chassis. A
                                                                                    lems in the areas of the anklebones,     depth gauge is marked front and
                                                                                    navicular bone or talus.                 back for even grinding. (Fig. J)
                                                                                    To adapt to this deviation of the        Low instep:
                                                                                    foot, it is possible to place wedges     The height and inclination of the
                                                                                    directly on the footboard.               footboard can be modified by
 J                                         K                                        However, this wedge should only be
                                                                                                                             - heel lifts (Fig. K)
                                                                                    used if the lateral articulation under
                                                                                    the ankle bone is mobile. (Fig. H)
BOOT                            foot anatomy & fIt > recommendatIons > 

FOOT ANATOMy ANd FIT > Recommendations (continued)
 Recommendations & Performance Accessories
The modifications that can be made         - Always proceed step by step,              They require the proper tools and          Important: Boots whose lower
on the Salomon boots should be               starting with temporary measures          should be undertaken only for big          shell material is not made of
considered as the ‘final touch’ of           before going on to permanent              problems and by experienced spe-           Polyurethane (PU), should not be
personalization.                             changes.                                  cialists. For example:                     heated (risk of damaging the ma-
Before undertaking this type of            - If you decide to proceed with the         - Stretching the shell.                    terial).
operation, it is important to observe        permanent modifications as a              - Grinding the liner (not recom-           To find out the lower shell mate-
certain basic rules:                         last resort, they are entirely your          mended for manufactured liners).        rial, see Boot Measurements &
                                             responsibility.                           - Grinding the shell.                      Materials chart on page 54.

 Problems, Causes & Solutions Chart
 Problems                                Causes                      Solutions
 FIRST METATARSAL PRESSURE               Shell too narrow.           Solutions all products:
 (medial side of the forefoot)           Prominent first             › Stick adhesive foam around the first metatarsal on the medial side
                                         metatarsal.                   of the liner.
                                                                     › Stretch the shell locally with a heat gun* and other tools designed
                                                                       for this purpose (such as SIDAS) (except Symbio and Rear Entry).
                                                                     X Wave, Ellipse, Performa: Be careful not to overheat the Sensifit or
                                                                     instep gusset of the boot during the heating operation (there is a risk
                                                                     of deforming it due to how thin this part is).

 FIFTH METATARSAL PRESSURE               Shell (or liner) too        Solutions all products:
 (lateral side of the forefoot)          narrow. Prominent           › Remove the insole (increases volume).
                                         fifth metatarsal.           › Stick adhesive foam around the painful area to dissipate the pressure.
                                                                     › Stretch the shell locally using a heat gun* and other tools designed for
                                                                       this purpose (such as SIDAS) (except Symbio and Rear Entry).
                                                                     X Wave, Performa and Verse: Be careful not to overheat the Sensifit
                                                                     or the instep gusset of the boot during the heating operation (there is
                                                                     a risk of deforming it due to how thin this part is).

 ANKLEBONE PRESSURE                      Prominent medial and        Solutions for Falcon, X Wave, Performa:
 Pain/pressure behind one or             lateral ankle bones.        Special precautions are required when stretching the shell:
 both ankle bones.                       Heel shape.                 › heat* the inside and outside of the cuff and lower shell simultaneously (so that both will be
                                                                       at the same temperature despite their different thicknesses and layers),
                                                                     › place the stretching device on the inside, close the boot during the
                                                                       stretching operation, and proceed with very small successive de-
                                                                       grees of stretching to avoid creating a space between the cuff and
                                                                       the shell.
                                                                     Falcon and X Wave:
                                                                     Be careful not to heat the metal parts (there is a risk of damaging the
                                                                     Solutions for Rear-Entry models:
                                                                     › Remove the insole to increase the volume.
                                                                     › Stick a C-shaped foam pad in the area around the
                                                                       ankle bones (on the liner).
                                                                     › Remove some foam from the liner in the area
                                                                       around the ankle bones.
                                                                     › Add shims to blue heel envelopment plate.

* Caution: The boots whose lower shells aren’t made of Polyurethane (PU) must not be stretched with heat (there is a risk of damaging the material). To find out what the
  lower shell is made of, see Boot Measurements & Materials chart on page 54).
BOOT                          foot anatomy & fIt > recommendatIons > 

FOOT ANATOMy ANd FIT > Recommendations (continued)
Problems, Causes & Solutions Chart
Problems                        Causes                   Solutions
HEEL PRESSURE                   Lack of room in the      Solutions all products:
                                boot. Prominent cal-     › Stick a chevron (foam pad in the form of an inverted V) above the
                                caneus (exostosis).        calcaneus to push the foot forward in the shell and reduce the
                                                           pressure on the heel.
                                                         › It is possible to remove some PU from both sides of the Achilles
                                                           tendon on the cuff (grinding) and/or on the lower shell
                                                           (Falcon, X Wave, Ellipse and Performa).

HEEL MOVEMENT                   Very narrow heel.        Solutions all products:
                                Achilles tendon axis     › Stick a chevron above the calcaneus on the liner.
                                very hollow.             › Stick an L-shaped piece of foam under each ankle bone (for bet-
                                                           ter grip).
                                Thin ankle.
                                                         › Add a shim to the top of the liner (forward position that pushes
                                                           the foot backward in the boot and increases pressure on the
                                                         › Use a thicker insole.
                                                         › Add a shim under the footboard.
                                                         › Add heel lifts.

INSULATION ANd NUMBNESS         Poor blood circulation   Solutions all products:
Cold, numb feet.                caused by pressure       › Make sure the adjustments are not too tight.
                                on the blood vessels/    › Remove the insoles from the liners.
                                nerves.                  › Add a small arch support and varus wedge (or a shim on the inside of the heel under
                                Poor foothold              the footboard from the performance series).
                                distribution             › Grind the footboard.
                                (especially with
CRAMPS                          Pronounced arch,         Solutions all products:
Muscle pain under the           high instep or flat      › Add or remove the arch support.
arch, in the calf, pressure     foot.                    › Add an insole or propose a custom insole.
points, irritations.            Pronated foot.           › Remove all shims under the footboard.
                                                         › Modify the angle of the forward lean to distribute the skier’s weight differently.
                                Thick lower leg.
                                                         › Grind the footboard.
                                                         › Grinding the Custom Sole:
                                                         To increase the volume of the boot or to change the position
                                                         of the foot. Caution, grind on the top surface only.
                                                         Grinding the base will affect the interface with the
                                                         Chassis. A depth gauge is marked front and
                                                         back for even grinding.

SHIN BITE                       Lack of pressure         Falcon:
                                distribution.            › Add a shin wedge on the cuff (choose the mounting position ac-
                                                           cording to the height of the skier).
HELMET & POLE                                                                                        helmet & Pole > 

A helmet designed with racers’ needs in mind: the highest level of safety with the lowest level of
constraints (full hearing, full vision spectrum and a fully customized fit). Low profile, the Equipe
also features a brand new fit and active ventilation.
Available from image price points to business price points.

   FREESTyLE                                           WOMAN                                             FEATURES
                            A truly adapted                                                                                     For 06 we’ve reworked
                            Freestyle offer –                                                                                   our fit and developed
                            lightweight, low                                                                                    all new liners for an
                            profile, and tricked                                                                                optimised fit and
                            out with all the right                                                                              guaranteed comfort.
                            features. Introducing
                            our first integrated
                                                                                Always one                                      + MORE VALUE
                            audio system.
                                                                                step ahead, our                                 AT KEY PRiCE
                                                                                successful women’s                              POinTS!
                                                                                offer comes back                                Enriched designs, more
                                                                                with even more                                  detail, and a business
                                                                                features and                                    wise color palette:
                                                                                appeal for 06.                                  safe color versions
                                                                                                                                for quantities, and eye
                                                                                                                                catching color versions
    Sticker pack included                                                                                                       to keep our offer

                                                                                 MATCHINg POLES
                                                                             The best of our technology to complete your ensemble.
HELMET & POLE                                                                                                                              helmet > 

 Helmet Technical Information
                                           Salomon channelled all its experi-          Helmets don’t offer
                                           ence for your protection and plea-          absolute protection, so
                                           sure but don’t lose your head!
                                           Our helmets combine our recognized
                                                                                       ride within your limits
                                                                                       and take care.                     !
                                           professionnalism and pure design to
                                           create protection for the senses.
                                           Our comprehensive winter sport               Standards
                                           helmet range meets applicable hel-          Examples of the main tests of norms:
                                           met standards and uses the unique
                                           Advanced Fit Technology design for
                                           your comfort and performance.
                                           Be smart and protect your head
                                           in style.

 Instructions for use and maintenance                                                                                           Roll off                dynamic fastening
                                                                                               Impact test                       test                      device test
- IMPORTANT: the helmet must always        - Do not use any type of gasoline
  be fastened on the head (chin strap        products, solvents or any other
  buckled under the chin).                   chemical substances.
- Check the adjustment and the condi-      - Do not modify the helmet in any
  tion of your helmet before each use.       way. Do not varnish it or add any
- Always take care of your helmet,           coloring products.
  even when not using it. Store it away    - After receiving an impact, the helmet
  from any heat source and sunlight          may be damaged to the point that                 Covered areas                    Visibility
                                                                                              measurement                     measurement
  (since prolonged exposure to the           it is no longer adequate to protect
  sun weakens all plastic materials,         the wearer’s head against further         All Salomon helmets respect the following standards :
  it is recommended to replace your          impacts. Even if the damage is not        CE - EN 1077                                  ASTM F2040 (helmets for recre-
  helmet at least every 3 years). Let it     visible, it is necessary to replace the   (helmets for alpine skiers*) -                ational* snow sports).
  dry in a ventilated area.                  helmet.
                                                                                       TÜV certified.                                * Non motorized winter sports
- For cleaning the outside surface of
  the skull cap, use soap and water

 My Perfect Fit
 A                                          S                                           D         a     d     b       c
                                                                                                                                      F        a    b      c

                                                                                                                  Autofit                                   Thermicfit
                                                                                                                  a. EPS shell                              a. EPS shell
                                                                                                                  b. Thermic foam                           b. Thermic foam
                                                                                                                     (PU)                                      (PU)
                                                                                                                  c. Textile                                c. Standard textile
                                                                                                                  d. Autofit foam
                                                                                                                                                a    b      c
In order to meet consumer’s                disposed on the anatomical areas            Thermicfit (Fig. F) Specific                  G
needs in terms of safety, head             to increase head comfort.                   construction and materials that
hold and comfort Salomon uses              Precisionfit (Fig. A) This system           guarantee a first impression of
two construction technologies:             allows a more precise adjustment            comfort + anatomical pre-forming
Standard technology and In Mold                                                        on the sensitive zones of the head                                   Thermicfit -
                                           of the helmet on the head.                                                                                       Choopa®
technology. Both provide per-                                                          (comfortable, anatomical envel-
                                           OSFA (Fig. S) With this adjust-                                                                                  a. EPS shell
formance in terms of resistance,                                                       opment).                                                             b. Thermic foam
                                           ment system the helmet is cover-
absorption, deflecting impact and                                                      Thermicfit - Choopa® (Fig. G)
                                           ing several sizes: one helmet for                                                                                c. Choopa fabrics
resisting penetration.
                                           sizes 51-55cm and one helmet for            The Choopa fabrics contain
Standard technology: an external           sizes 55-58cm.                              AgION™ antimicrobial technology.
cap made of ABS combined with                                                                                                        AgION™ antimicrobial compound
                                           Autofit (Fig. D) In addition to             AgION™ antimicrobial compound                 is registered by the EPA as an
an internal cap made of EPS. This                                                      combines silver with a naturally
                                           exceptional comfort, this liner of-                                                       antimicrobial additive to be incor-
technology is commonly used by                                                         occurring inorganic ceramic that
                                           fers precise envelopment with its                                                         porated into many materials to
every helmet manufacturer.                                                             permits a continuous and con-
                                           self-molding foams located on the                                                         impart antimicrobial activity to the
In Mold technology: an external            sensitive areas of the head. Auto-          trolled release of ionic silver over          manufactured products. AgION™
PC layer molded together with              molding foams allow the liner to            an extended period of time.                   antimicrobial compound sup-
the EPS cap to provide the best            take on the shape of the head al-           AgION™ antimicrobial compound                 presses the growth of bacteria,
ratio lightness / resistance to the        lowing perfect anatomical adapta-           has been successfully and cost                algae, fungus, mold and mildew.
helmet.                                    tion of the head’s sensitive areas.         effectively incorporated into fibers
Fit foams: All our models are              The helmet hold is reinforced by            and fabrics with proven effective-
benefiting from specific Fit foams         this construction.                          ness and safety.
HELMET & POLE                                                                                                                  helmet > 0

HELMET TECHNOLOgy > (continued)
 Choosing the right size for your helmet

 YOUR SiZE Head perimeter (cm)               51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
                                                                  XS                m
 diadem PF                                                       (54)              (58)
 Siam AF                                                                  S                 L                               Choosing your size (see table):
 Rush AF                                                                (56)              (59)                              The helmet is a safety product.
                                                                                                                            To ensure optimal protection,
                                                                                                                            comfort and head hold, the helmet
 AdULT MEN                                                                                                                  must be chosen in the correct size.
 Essential AF / PF                                                XS                m                   XL                  To choose the correct size, it is
                                                                 (54)              (58)                (61)                 necessary to measure the cranial
 Focus TF / Foil audio                                                                                                      perimeter of the head in cm (from
                                                                          S                 L                 XXL           the forehead to the most promi-
 Equipe Racing* / Equipe PF*                                            (56)              (59)                (62)          nent back part of the head).
 Seek PF* / Valdez TF*       * No XS size                                                                                   Helmet adjustment:
                                                                                                                            The helmet must be properdine
                                                                                                                            positioned on, and adjusted to the
 JUNIOR                                                                                                                     user’s head to ensure maximum
                                                       S (55)                                                               comfort and protection.
 Equipe JR
                                                                                                                            A properly positioned helmet must
 Mynx                                                                                                                       not be too far forward or back-
                                                                            m (58)
                                                                                                                            wards on the user’s head ; the chin
                                                                                                                            strap must always be properly
                                                                                                                            adjusted and in the closed position.
                                              XXS           XS            S         m                                       In case of children’s helmets, an
                                              (52)         (54)         (56)       (58)                                     adult should always check that the
                                                                                                                            helmet is properly secured.

 Head Measurer Use & Maintenance
 H                                           J                                      K                                        L

Warning:                                    The helmet is a safety product: it     - Hold the measurer in this posi-        Maintenance recommendations:
Salomon has developed a head                must be chosen in the size that is       tion and turn the roller (A) (rotate   To clean the measurer, you can use
measurer that will help you to bet-         suitable to its user and be properly     it clockwise).                         a cloth with soap and water.
ter serve your customer by being            positioned on his/her head (the        - Turn the roller until it disengages    It is prohibited to use chemi-
able to recommend the helmet size           chin strap adjusted in the closed        (Fig. J).                              cal products, hot water or pres-
that corresponds to the circumfer-          position) to ensure optimum pro-       - Carefully remove the measurer          surized water, gasoline, alcohol,
ence of his/her head.                       tection, comfort and hold.               from the head, pulling the rear        detergents, solvents or aerosols
This measurer can be used for all           Recommendations for use:                 upward, while maintaining pres-        that could permanently damage
Salomon Alpine and In Line Skate            - Loosen the roller (A) to be able       sure on the nose (Fig. K).             the plastic materials and erase the
helmets.                                      to place the measurer easily on      - Read the measurement on the            markings.
                                              the head.                              graduated scale (E) in the win-
Please remember that the size                                                                                               Warning:
                                            - Position the measurer on the           dow (Fig. L).
given by the measurer (centime-                                                                                             Salomon does not cover any dam-
                                              head according to (Fig. H),          - Choose the helmet according to
ters) should be used only as an                                                                                             age to the head measurer that is a
                                              touching the brow (B) and the          the size given by the measurer.
indication to help you orient your                                                                                          result of transportation, storage or
                                              occipital bone (C).                  - Try the helmet on. Switch sizes if
customer toward the proper size.                                                                                            not abiding by the instructions for
                                               Important: Make sure the head-        there is a problem with the fit.
The final selection of the appropri-                                                                                        use or maintenance.
ate size should be left to the cus-            band (d) does not compress          Salomon has provided for stickers
tomer.                                         the ears, which would affect the    that can be put on the head mea-
                                               measurement.                        surer for a better understanding of
Using the measurer should never
                                                                                   how to use the roller.
replace trying on the helmet.
HELMET & POLE                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   helmet & Pole > 1

HELMET TECHNOLOgy > (Continued)
 Helmet Technical Reference Chart
                                                                                                                                                                                                                 06/07 HELMET Range

                                                                                                                                                                             SHELL                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       OTHER
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         LinER                                                                                              EAR PAdS                                                   VEnTiLATiOn                                                                                                             FiniSH
                                                                                                                                                                          TECHnOLOgY                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  SPECiFiCiTiES nORMS

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       CE-En1077 (TÜV certification) /
                                                                                                                                                                                                        injected ABS shell + EPS cap
                                                                                                                                    WEigHT* (g)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Removable / washable liner

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Composite shell + EPS cap

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     OSFA (one Size Fits All)
                                    MOdELS                       (cm)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Women specific liner

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           Adaptable chinguard
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Removable ear pads
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Precision fit system

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Chinstrap dressing
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   On/Off ventilation
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Active ventilation
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Airflow concept

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             Screen printing

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  diamond inlay
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Sound system

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       ASTM F-2040
                                                                                                                                                                          in-mold shell

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Sticker pack
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             Matte finish
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Autifit liner

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Vent plugs


                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  Race fit

                                 Equipe Racing      55-56 57-58 58-59 60-61 61-62                                            550 g                                                                                                             •                                                                                         •                              •                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   •                                                                                                         •                          •                                                                 •
                                 Equipe PF          55-56 57-58 58-59 60-61 61-62                                            560 g                                                                               •                                                                                                                       •                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   •                                                             •                                                                          •                          •                                                                 •

                                 Seek PF            55-56 57-58 58-59 60-61 61-62                                            560 g                                                                               •                                                                                                                       •                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   •                                                             •                                                                          •

                                 Rush AF               54-55 55-56 57-58 58-59                                               560 g                                                                               •                                                                                                                       •                                                                  •                                                                    •                                                                                           •                                                             •                        •                                                 •
                                 Valdez TF          55-56 57-58 58-59 60-61 61-62                                            530 g                                                                               •                                                                                               •                       •                                                                                                                                                                                           •                                                                                                     •                                                                          •                                                                                            •
                                 Equipe Jr                     51-55 55-58                                                   580 g                                                                               •                                                          •                                    •                       •                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   •                                                             •                                                                          •                          •                                                                 •

                                 Choopa Jr             51-52 53-54 55-56 57-58                                               440 g                                                                               •                                                                                                                       •                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           n                                                               •                                                                                                             •
                                 Essential PF    54-55 55-56 57-58 58-59 60-61 61-62                                         420 g                                            •                                                                                                                                                          •                                             •                                              •                      •                   •                                                   •                  •                                                                                                           •                                                 •                                                                                            •
                                 diadem PF             54-55 55-56 57-58 58-59                                               420 g                                            •                                                                                                                                                          •                                             •                    •                         •                      •                   •                                                   •                  •                                                                                                           •            •                                    •                                                                •                           •
                                 Essential AF    54-55 55-56 57-58 58-59 60-61 61-62                                         390 g                                            •                                                                                                                                                          •                                             •                                                                     •                                                                       •                  •                                                                                                                       s                                     •                                                                                            •

                                 Siam AF               54-55 55-56 57-58 58-59                                               390 g                                            •                                                                                                                                                          •                                             •                    •                                                •                   •                                                   •                  •                                                                                                                                                             •                                                                                            •

                                 Foil Audio      54-55 55-56 57-58 58-59 60-61 61-62                                         430 g                                            •                                                                                                                                  •                       •                                                                                                                   •                   •               •                  •                                                                                                                                               •                                                 •                                                •                                           •
                                 Focus TF        54-55 55-56 57-58 58-59 60-61 61-62                                         370 g                                            •                                                                                                                                  •                       •                                                                                                                   •                                                      •                                                                                                                                                                                                 •                                                                                            •
                                                               51-55 55-58                                                   390 g                                            •                                                                                             •                                    •                       •                                                                                                                   •                   •                                  •                                                                                                                                                                                                 •                                                •                                           •

                                 Fierce                        51-55 55-58                                                   390 g                                            •                                                                                             •                                    •                       •                                                                                                                   •                                                      •                                                                                                                                                                                                 •                                                •                                           •
*Weight based on helmet size 58 for all models except size 54 for Choopa Jr
s Only for White/Silver color version
n Only for Orange color version

 Pole Technical Reference Chart
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                06/07 POLE Range

                                                                                                                             gRiP                                                                                                                                   STRAP                                                                                                                                                                                                              SHAFT                                                                                                                                                   dESign                                                                           diSC                                                                         TiP
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Velcro race strap (35 mm)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                Ovalisation (Wing shape)
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Ovalisation (oval shape)
                                                                                                                                                                              Bi-material racing grip

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               Screen printing design

                                                    SiZE            WEigHT
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              Carbon4* C HHHH
                                                                                    Ergonomic Junior grip

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      interchangeable discs
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Large neoprene strap
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Velcro strap (35 mm)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Large strap (35 mm)
                                                                                                                                                  Ultra light foam grip

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             Carbon3* C HHH

                                                    (cm)              (g)
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             ALU4* Al HHHH

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           Carbide / Widia tip
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Carbon2* C HH

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  new sport basket
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   ALU3* Al HHH
                                                                                                                             Bi-material grip

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            Starlock system
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               diameter (mm)
                                                                                                            Ergonomic grip

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 new dH basket
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               ALU2* Al HH
                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Standard strap

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           Standard disc
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  gS bent shaft

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        3d plates

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     ice tip

                        Equipe                    110 to 135     240 (Size : 125)                                                                                                     •                                                                                                         •                                                                                                                                 •                                                                                     •                      18                                        •                                                            •                                                          •                                                   •                                                           •

                        Teneighty                 110 to 135     250 (Size : 125)                                                                                                     •                                        •                                                                                                                                                                                                  •                                                                                                            18                                                                       •                             •                                                                                                                                •               •
                        Racer                     110 to 135     240 (Size : 125)                                                                                                     •                                                                                                         •                                                                                                                                 •                                                                                                            18                                                                       •                             •                                                          •                                                                     •               •
                        X-Wing                    110 to 135     250 (Size : 125)                                                 •                                                                                            •                                                                                                                                                                      •                                                                                                                                        18                                                                                                     •                                                                                                                                •               •
                        F1                        110 to 135     250 (Size : 125)                                                 •                                                                                            •                                                                                                                                                                      •                                                                                                                                        18                                                                                                     •                                        •                                                                                                       •
                        Crossmax                  110 to 135     250 (Size : 125)                                                                                                     •                                                                       •                                                                                                                                                                   •                                                                                                            18                                        •                                                            •                                                          •                                                   •                                 •
                        CT-1                      110 to 135     250 (Size : 125)                                                                        •                                                                                                                                                                 •                                                                                                                                                                       •                                           11                                                                                                     •                                                                                      •                                                                                   •

                        Cosmic                    110 to 135     250 (Size : 125)                                                                                                     •                                                                                                                                                                       •                                                                   •                                                                                                                                                                                     •                             •                     •                                                                                                          •               •
                        Allium                    110 to 135     250 (Size : 125)                                                                                                     •                                        •                                                                                                                                                                                                  •                                                                                                            18                                                                       •                             •                                                                                                                                •               •
                        Arctic                    110 to 135     250 (Size : 125)                                                 •                                                                                            •                                                                                                                                                  •                                                                                                                                                            18                                                                                                     •                                        •                                                                                                       •
                        Arctic                    110 to 135     250 (Size : 125)                                                 •                                                                                            •                                                                                                                                                  •                                                                                                                                                            18                                                                                                     •                                        •                                                                                                       •
                        northpole                 110 to 135     250 (Size : 125)                               •                                                                                                              •                                                                                                                                                  •                                                                                                                                                            18                                                                                                     •                                        •                                                                                                       •
                        Kaloo                     70 to 110      160 (Size : 110)          •                                                                                                                                   •                                                                                                                                                  •                                                                                                                                                      14/16                                                                                                        •                                        •                                                                                                       •

                        Rental Composite          110 to 135     230 (Size : 125)                                                 •                                                                                            •                                                                                                                                                                                                                            •                                                                                  16                                                                                                     •                     •                  •                                                                                                       •

                        Rental Alu                110 to 135     240 (Size : 125)                               •                                                                                                              •                                                                                                                                                                                                  •                                                                                                            18                                                                                                     •                     •                  •                                                                                                       •
                        Rental Alu Jr             70 to 105      145 (Size : 90)           •                                                                                                                                   •                                                                                                                                                                                                  •                                                                                                            14                                                                                                     •                     •                  •                                                                                                       •
HELMET & POLE                                                                                                                    Pole > 

POLE TECHNONOLgy > (Continued)
 Pole Technical Information

 Choosing a pole size                                                           Maintenance Recommendations
      - Turn the pole upside down with the tip pointing up,                    Use a cloth with soap and water to clean the poles. It is prohibited to use
      - Hold the pole right under the basket,                                  chemicals, hot water or pressurized water, gasoline, alcohol, detergents,
      - Your arm will form a right angle (90°) when you have                   solvents or aerosols that can permanently damage the plastic materials
        the ideal size.                                                        and erase the cosmetics.

 Mounting the replaceable baskets > Procedure                                   Benefits of main technical features
Salomon has made 3 types of replaceable baskets available to you:              - Spaceframe shaft: specific 3D        - Gripfit: the grip with the best fit
                                                                                 shapes (wing and AHT) for              and right shapes for less efforts.
  1                  2                   3                 4                     advanced performance: higher         - NPS (No Problem Strap): dual
                                                                                 resistance and stiffness.              side strap, easy to use and with
                                                                               - Bi-material grip:                      improved comfort.
                                                                                 › hard part for precision,           - Interchangeable baskets: the big
                                                                                 › soft part for comfort.               one fits off-pists and powder, the
                                                                               - Racing grip: specifically de-          small one is more adapted for all
                                                                                 signed for racers, a closer grip       other uses.
A) Position the basket according to      C) Screw the basket on completely       to the pole for higher precision.    - Carbide tip: bi-material tip for
   the two side pins. Fig. A&S.             until you hear four clicks (wear   - Ultra light foam grip: the best        higher resistance and durability.
   Turn the basket 1/4 times to at-         gloves as a precaution). Fig. F      grip if you need lightness and
   tach it.                                                                      comfort with or without gloves.
B) Mounting: at the same time,
   screw the basket on and push it                                              Rental Poles
   towards the handle of the pole.
   Fig. D. Removing: at the same                                               - Salomon designed specific poles for rental adapted to a professional
   time, unscrew the basket and                                                  and intense use.
   pull it toward the tip of the pole.                                         - This warranty will not apply for damages resulting of rental use of poles
                                                                                 that was not designed specifically for rental.

 Pole Shaft Materials > Technical Features
Aluminium range                          Aluminium Technology                  Composite range                        Carbon Technology
- Salomon know-how in alumini-             by Salomon                          - We do our pole’s shafts the            by Salomon
  um is proven with bindings, ILS                                                same way that golf companies
  and Mavic wheels.
- According to this experience, we
                                           Al HHHH                               do their own golf shafts.
                                                                               - We defined three levels of
                                                                                                                         C HHHH
                                         40 stronger                                                                 45 more Carbon
  defined three levels of strength:                                              Carbon grade:

                                           Al HHH                                                                        C HHH
                                         15 stronger                                                                 15 more Carbon

                                           Al HH                                                                         C HH
                                         Competitive strength/price ratio                                             Competitive stiffness/strength ratio
WARRANTy                                                                                                                             warranty > 

 Salomon Retail Binding Limited Warranty
Salomon Retail Alpine Bindings are covered under warranty against defects in materials and manufacturing for a period of five years from their date of purchase to the
original customer. In the absence of proof-of-purchase, this warranty period will be five years from date of manufacture of the product as indicated by production code. This
warranty only covers the defective component, not the full pair or set, i.e., left toe piece, brake, right heel, etc. Abuse and normal wear are not covered by this warranty.

 Replacement Procedures                                                                  Mechanical Inspection Failures
Step One. Verify by customer receipt or production code that the defective              Normal wear is expected with the use of a product. Should a component fail a
component is under warranty. (Warranty claims should be handled through                 mechanical inspection (measured release values that fall outside the “In-Use
Authorized Dealers to ensure speed and accuracy of product replacement.                 Range”) within its warranty period, include the following information with the
Please do not refer a customer directly to Salomon.)                                    returned component.
Step Two: Call customer service for return authorization number. (There is no           • Description of inspection that the component failed.
longer an express warranty form.)                                                       • Brand of test device and date of most recent calibration.
                                                                                        • Skier Code and visual indicator setting.
Step Three: Return the defective set to Salomon with the return authorization           • Boot brand, model and sole length.
number clearly printed on the outside of the package. Return the entire set, un-        • All measured release values and name of the technician.
less otherwise instructed by customer service.                                          Every Salomon binding component is precision tested to assure its accuracy
Ship the package freight pre-paid to:                                                   during manufacture. It is extremely rare that a component would be out of
USA                                     Canada                                          calibration unless there is visible damage. All bindings returned due to me-
Salomon Service Center                  adidas-Salomon Canada Limited                   chanical testing failures are inspected. No replacement product will be issued
5914 N. Basin Ave.                      3545 Thimens Blvd.                              unless all required information is included with the product.
Portland, OR 97217                      Saint-Laurent, Quebec H4R 1V5
Upon a dealer’s request to Customer Service, a warranty replacement compo-               Product Age Verification
nent can be shipped in advance to the dealer before it is inspected at Salomon’s        Verification that the product is within the warranty period can be made in
Service Center. Salomon will invoice the dealer for the replacement component           the following two ways:
and issue a credit when the defective component is received and verified. If the        1. Customer receipt indicating product was purchased within the last five years.
defective component exchanged for the advance replacement is not received               2. Component production code* indicating manufacture of product within last five
within 45 days from the issue of the Return Authorization Number, or proves                years.
not to be defective, no credit will be issued for the replacement product.
Step Four: Salomon will ship the replacement product to the dealer, surface
freight pre-paid, after verification of the defect.
                                                                                          * All Salomon binding components are stamped with a two- or three-digit code upon their
                                                                                            final production to indicate month and year of production. Normally, codes are a letter
 Salomon Service Center                                                                     followed by a number, with the letter indicating month of production. Each number cor-
In the event an unusual situation is encountered or a technical question arises             responds to the actual year of production, i.e., 1 would indicate 2001, 2 would indicate
please call the Salomon Service Center at:                                                  2002, etc. To simplify the warranty process, product age is determined by the year of
                                                                                            production only. Retail bindings with a production code indicating that the bindings were
USA 1-800-654-2668                                                                          manufactured in 2002 (e.g., A2, M2) will be warranted until the end of the 2006/2007 ski
CAN 1-800-361-3398 ext. 1142                                                                season. Production codes are stamped in various places on all binding components.

 Salomon Alpine Skis, Snowblade & Boot Warranty
Salomon alpine skis, Snowblade and          Ski: if there is a problem that is cov-     defective product with a model or pair           ent to follow the instructions for use,
boots are warranted for a period of 2       ered by the warranty (breakage, pulled      within the limits of available stock.            modification of the product or normal
years from date of original purchase.       edge…) that occurs during the war-          These warranties cover skis, Snowblade,          wear and tear.
To determine the period covered by the      ranty period (2 years), Salomon will re-    bindings against manufacturing defects.          In case of damage to a product caused
warranty, the customer has to show the      place either the Ski + Binding unit or                                                       by an accident or misuse, please consult
                                                                                        However, these warranties do not
sales receipt.                              the Ski Only at our discretion.                                                              Salomon Customer Service for advice
                                                                                        cover damage resulting from transport,
The Salomon Snowblade warranty can          Binding: if there is a problem that         handling, storage, failure by the cli-           on possible repair or replacement.
only function if the customer presents      is covered by the Salomon warranty
the Snowblade unit to the dealer as it      (breakage, binding pulled-out…) that
was sold (ski and binding). If not, the     occurs during the warranty period            Ski problems not covered by the warranty
                                            (5 years), Salomon will replace the         Problems                  Solutions
warranty cannot be honored.
                                            Ski + Binding unit, except if the dam-      Bent skis                 Contact subsidiary for more information
Salomon Pilot set warranty                                                              Top surface               Can be repaired
                                            age concerns the brake or the AFD plate.
The skis are covered for 2 years from                                                   Tip protector             Can be repaired with spare parts
                                            In this case, Salomon will replace the      Tail protector            Cannot be repaired
the date of original purchase.
                                            defective part(s) with spare parts.         Running surface           Can be repaired
The bindings are covered by a 5 years                                                   Binding pull-out          Can be repaired with inserts
                                            Salomon’s only liability as regards this
warranty from the date of original                                                      Pulled edge               Can be repaired
                                            warranty will be to repair or replace the
                                                                                        For all other problems, contact the subsidiary Customer Service.

 Salomon Helmet & Alpine Pole Warranty
Salomon helmets and poles are guar-         by this warranty. This warranty applies     Salomon’s only liability regarding this          They are not designed to be used on
anteed against defects in materials and     only to products sold by an Authorized      warranty will be to repair or replace the        motorbikes or for other sports, me-
manufacturing for a period of one year      Salomon Dealer. For warranty service,       defective product with a model in an             chanical or not.
from their date of purchase*.               present the defective helmet with the       available version.                               The Alpine Salomon poles are designed
This warranty only covers the defective     original sales receipt to your nearest      Warning:                                         for crosscountry or downhill skiing only,
components. Claims arising from im-         Authorized Salomon Dealer.                  The Salomon helmets are designed only            except for the adjustable poles that can
proper storage of product, modification,    * This warranty may vary in some            for the following activities: ski, snow-         be used for downhill skiing and hiking.
abuse and normal wear are not covered       countries.                                  board and skiboard (Snowblade®).
    Salomon North America
    1 (800) 225-6850

    Salomon Canada Sports
    2700 14TH AVE UNIT 1-4
    MARkHAM, ON L3R 0J1

Printed in Canada

To top